GE

Grid Solutions

345
Transformer Protection
System
Transformer protection and control

Instruction manual
345 revision: 2.3x
Manual P/N: 1601-9098-AF
GE publication code: GEK-113568P

E83849

LISTED

*1601-9098-AF* IND.CONT. EQ.

52TL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 © 2017 GE Multilin Incorporated. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System instruction manual for revision 2.3x.
345 Transformer Protection System, EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista
3 Series Setup are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part number: 1601-9098-AF (September 2017)

Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow
the storage temperature range outlined in the Specifications.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-
energized state once per year, for one hour continuously.

This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European

Union. For proper recycling return this product to your supplier or a designated
collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - 345
Note

• Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s)
could cause irreversible damage to the equipment and could lead to property
damage, personal injury and/or death.
• Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and
caution indicators are reviewed.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or
functions abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired operation and injury.
• Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
• Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.
• Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
• All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable
and un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
• Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s
main ground system for primary power.
• Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
• At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device
operation and service.
• In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
• Before working on CTs, they must be short-circuited.
• LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class
1M. Class 1M devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly
with optical instruments.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety words and definitions
The following symbols used in this document indicate the following conditions

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
Note

injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
Note

injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or

Note

moderate injury.

Indicates practices not related to personal injury.

Note

For further assistance

For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: [email protected]
Europe e-mail: [email protected]
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 1
Description of the 345 Transformer Protection System.............................. 1 - 2
345 order codes.............................................................................................................. 1 - 7
Specifications................................................................................................................... 1 - 9
Password security................................................................................................................1 - 9
Protection.................................................................................................................................1 - 9
Metering....................................................................................................................................1 - 11
Data capture ..........................................................................................................................1 - 12
Control .......................................................................................................................................1 - 12
Monitoring................................................................................................................................1 - 14
Inputs .........................................................................................................................................1 - 14
Outputs......................................................................................................................................1 - 15
Power supply..........................................................................................................................1 - 15
Communications ..................................................................................................................1 - 16
Testing and certification ...................................................................................................1 - 17
Physical.....................................................................................................................................1 - 18
Environmental........................................................................................................................1 - 19

2. INSTALLATION Mechanical installation ............................................................................................... 2 - 1

Dimensions..............................................................................................................................2 - 1
Product identification .........................................................................................................2 - 3
Mounting ..................................................................................................................................2 - 4
Standard panel mount .....................................................................................................2 - 4
Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion.....................................................................2 - 9
IP20 Cover (optional) ...........................................................................................................2 - 10
Electrical installation .................................................................................................... 2 - 11
Typical Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................2 - 12
345 Terminal identification..............................................................................................2 - 14
Wire range...............................................................................................................................2 - 17
RMIO module installation..................................................................................................2 - 18
Phase sequence and transformer polarity ..............................................................2 - 19
Current inputs ........................................................................................................................2 - 19
Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs ....................................................................2 - 20
Zero sequence CT installation ........................................................................................2 - 21
Control power ........................................................................................................................2 - 21
Contact inputs .......................................................................................................................2 - 22
Trip1 and Trip2 output relays .........................................................................................2 - 23
Serial communications ......................................................................................................2 - 25
IRIG-B .........................................................................................................................................2 - 26

3. INTERFACES Front control panel interface.................................................................................... 3 - 2

Description ..............................................................................................................................3 - 3
Display.......................................................................................................................................3 - 4
Working with the Keypad ...............................................................................................3 - 4
LED status indicators - Front panel with non-programmable LEDs ............3 - 5
LED status indicators - Front panel with programmable LEDs ......................3 - 7
Relay messages....................................................................................................................3 - 8
Target messages.................................................................................................................3 - 8
Self-test errors......................................................................................................................3 - 9
Flash messages ...................................................................................................................3 - 11

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Software setup.................................................................................................................3 - 12
Quick setup - Software interface.................................................................................. 3 - 12
EnerVista 3 Series Setup Software............................................................................... 3 - 12
Hardware and software requirements.....................................................................3 - 13
Installing the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software..................................................3 - 13
Upgrading the software...................................................................................................3 - 16
Connecting EnerVista 3 Series Setup to the relay ............................................... 3 - 16
Configuring serial communications...........................................................................3 - 16
Using the Quick Connect feature ................................................................................3 - 17
Configuring Ethernet communications ....................................................................3 - 19
Connecting to the relay ...................................................................................................3 - 20
Working with setpoints and setpoint files ................................................................ 3 - 21
Engaging a device ..............................................................................................................3 - 21
Entering setpoints...............................................................................................................3 - 21
Setting programmable LEDs..........................................................................................3 - 22
File support ............................................................................................................................3 - 23
Using setpoint files .............................................................................................................3 - 23
Downloading and saving setpoint files ....................................................................3 - 24
Adding setpoint files to the environment ................................................................3 - 24
Creating a new setpoint file ...........................................................................................3 - 25
Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision .............................................................3 - 25
Printing setpoints and actual values .........................................................................3 - 26
Printing actual values from a connected device .................................................3 - 27
Loading setpoints from a file.........................................................................................3 - 28
Uninstalling files and clearing data............................................................................3 - 28
Upgrading relay firmware ............................................................................................... 3 - 29
Loading new relay firmware .........................................................................................3 - 29
Advanced EnerVista 3 Series Setup features.......................................................... 3 - 31
Transient recorder (Waveform capture)...................................................................3 - 31
Protection summary .........................................................................................................3 - 34
Password security ..............................................................................................................3 - 36

4. ACTUAL VALUES Actual values overview ................................................................................................4 - 1

A1 Status.............................................................................................................................4 - 2
Clock........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Output relays ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Logic elements ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Contact inputs summary ................................................................................................. 4 - 4
Output relays summary ................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Logic elements summary ................................................................................................ 4 - 4
GOOSE status......................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
GOOSE HDR status .............................................................................................................. 4 - 5
61850 status .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
A2 Metering .......................................................................................................................4 - 6
Winding 1 Current ............................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Winding 2 Current ............................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Transformer Differential and Restraint Currents .................................................. 4 - 7
Transformer Thermal Capacity ..................................................................................... 4 - 8
Current Demand 1(2).......................................................................................................... 4 - 8
Clear current demand 1 (2).............................................................................................. 4 - 9
A3 Records.........................................................................................................................4 - 10
Event records......................................................................................................................... 4 - 10

TOC-2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Transient records .................................................................................................................4 - 12
Fault report..............................................................................................................................4 - 13
Learned data ..........................................................................................................................4 - 14
Clear learned data ...............................................................................................................4 - 14
Clear event record ...............................................................................................................4 - 14
Clear transient record ........................................................................................................4 - 14
Clear thermal capacity record.......................................................................................4 - 15
Clear fault report ..................................................................................................................4 - 15
A4 Target messages ..................................................................................................... 4 - 16

5. QUICK SETUP - Quick Setup settings..................................................................................................... 5 - 2

FRONT CONTROL
PANEL

6. SETPOINTS Setpoints Main Menu.................................................................................................... 6 - 1

Setpoint entry methods ....................................................................................................6 - 2
Common setpoints .............................................................................................................6 - 2
Logic diagrams......................................................................................................................6 - 3
Setting text abbreviations ................................................................................................6 - 4
S1 Relay setup................................................................................................................. 6 - 5
Clock ...........................................................................................................................................6 - 5
Password security................................................................................................................6 - 7
Access passwords ..............................................................................................................6 - 8
Communications ..................................................................................................................6 - 10
RS485 interface ...................................................................................................................6 - 10
Ethernet...................................................................................................................................6 - 10
Modbus....................................................................................................................................6 - 11
IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication ..................................................................6 - 12
IEC60870-5-104 protocol................................................................................................6 - 12
DNP communication .........................................................................................................6 - 12
3 Series IEC 61850 GOOSE details...............................................................................6 - 13
Event recorder .......................................................................................................................6 - 14
Transient recorder ...............................................................................................................6 - 15
Fault report..............................................................................................................................6 - 16
Front panel with non-programmable LEDs .............................................................6 - 17
Front panel with programmable LEDs .......................................................................6 - 18
Installation ...............................................................................................................................6 - 20
S2 System Setup ............................................................................................................ 6 - 21
Current sensing .....................................................................................................................6 - 21
Power system ........................................................................................................................6 - 22
Transformer ............................................................................................................................6 - 22
Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations ..................................6 - 23
Winding breakers .................................................................................................................6 - 35
S3 Protection.................................................................................................................... 6 - 37
Breaker tripping ....................................................................................................................6 - 37
Transformer percent differential (87T)........................................................................6 - 40
Transformer instantaneous differential (50/87).....................................................6 - 45
Restricted ground fault (87G or RGF)...........................................................................6 - 47
Thermal Overload (49)........................................................................................................6 - 52
Time overcurrent curves...................................................................................................6 - 56
Phase timed overcurrent (51P).......................................................................................6 - 60
Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50P).....................................................................6 - 63
Ground timed overcurrent (51G/SG)............................................................................6 - 65
Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G/SG) .........................................................6 - 68

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL TOC-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Neutral timed overcurrent (51N)................................................................................... 6 - 71
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)................................................................. 6 - 74
Negative sequence timed overcurrent (51_2)........................................................ 6 - 76
Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent (50_2)...................................... 6 - 79
S4 Controls.........................................................................................................................6 - 81
Change setpoint group ..................................................................................................... 6 - 81
Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 82
Logic elements ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 83
Winding breaker failure .................................................................................................... 6 - 92
Lockout (86)............................................................................................................................. 6 - 94
S5 Inputs/Outputs ..........................................................................................................6 - 96
Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 96
Output relays ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 97
Output Relay 1 - W1 breaker "Trip" ............................................................................6 - 98
Output Relay 2 - W2 breaker "Trip" ............................................................................6 - 98
Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6 ......................................................................................6 - 100
Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 101
Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 102
Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 6 - 102
S6 Monitoring....................................................................................................................6 - 103
Demand.................................................................................................................................... 6 - 103
Current demand ..................................................................................................................6 - 104
RTD temperature monitoring (49T) .............................................................................. 6 - 105

7. MAINTENANCE M1 Relay information ...................................................................................................7 - 2

M3 Breaker maintenance ...........................................................................................7 - 4
Trip coil...................................................................................................................................... 7 - 4
Breaker trip counter............................................................................................................ 7 - 8
Breaker health....................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Reset counters ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
M4 Breaker monitor.......................................................................................................7 - 14
M5 Relay maintenance................................................................................................7 - 15
Ambient temperature ........................................................................................................ 7 - 15
M7 Testing..........................................................................................................................7 - 17
Force LEDs............................................................................................................................... 7 - 17
Force output relays............................................................................................................. 7 - 18
General maintenance...................................................................................................7 - 19
In-service maintenance.................................................................................................... 7 - 19
Out-of-service maintenance .......................................................................................... 7 - 19
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)................................................ 7 - 19

A. APPENDIX Warranty ............................................................................................................................A - 1

Repairs .................................................................................................................................A - 2
Change Notes...................................................................................................................A - 3
Manual Revision history.................................................................................................... A - 3

TOC-4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 1: Introduction

Introduction

Overview
The 345 is a microprocessor-based relay for primary and backup protection of small to
medium size distribution transformers. The relay provides advanced algorithms for
automatic magnitude and phase compensation for more than twenty types of two-
winding transformers, good sensitivity for the detection of winding ground faults, and the
flexibility to set any of the phase, ground, neutral and negative sequence currents over-
current elements. The 345 relay has a small footprint and is withdrawable for easy
mounting into either new or retrofit installations. The combination of proven hardware,
advanced features, and communications, makes the relay superior for total transformer
metering, monitoring, protection and control. Equipped with serial (RS485), USB, and
Ethernet ports, as well as a wide selection of protocols such as Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC60870-
5-103, 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE, the 345 relay is the best-in-class for either MCCs,
SCADA or inter-relay communications. The 345 provides excellent accessibility and
transparency with regard to power system conditions and events, through both its four-
line 20 character display, and the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. Conveniently located
LEDs indicate the relay status, pickup, operation, and alarm events, as well as the status of
each winding breaker.
The 345 relay provides the following key benefits:
• Withdrawable small footprint – saves on rewiring and space.
• Multiple protection groups with the flexibility to switch through a wide selection of
main and backup transformer protections and controls.
• Fast setup (Quick Setup) menu for power system configuration and protection.
• Large four-line LCD display, LEDs, and keypad
• Multiple communication protocols and simultaneous access with easy integration into
monitoring and control systems.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Description of the 345 Transformer Protection

System
CPU
Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5554 32-bit
microprocessor measures all analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output
relays; a Freescale MPC520B 32-bit microprocessor controls all the Ethernet
communication protocols.
Analog Input and Waveform Capture
Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the
source instrument transformers. The analog signals are then passed through a 960 Hz low
pass anti-aliasing filter. All signals are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold
buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. The signals are converted to digital values by a
12-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis.
Both current and voltage are sampled thirty-two times per power frequency cycle. These
‘raw’ samples are scaled in software, then placed into the waveform capture buffer, thus
emulating a fault recorder. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the
EnerVista 3 Series Setup software for display and diagnostics.
Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics
Current waveforms are processed four times every cycle with a DC Offset Filter and a
Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The resulting phasors have fault current transients and all
harmonics removed. This results in an overcurrent relay that is extremely secure and
reliable; one that will not overreach.
Processing of AC Current Inputs
The DC Offset Filter is an infinite impulse response (IIR) digital filter, which removes the DC
component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. This is
done for all current signals used for overcurrent protection; voltage signals bypass the DC
Offset Filter. This filter ensures no overreach of the overcurrent protection.
The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) uses exactly one sample cycle to calculate a phasor
quantity which represents the signal at the fundamental frequency; all harmonic
components are removed. All subsequent calculations (e.g. RMS, power, etc.) are based
upon the current and voltage phasors, such that the resulting values have no harmonic
components.
Protection Elements
The protection elements are processed four times per power cycle. The protection
elements use RMS current, based on the magnitude of the phasor. Hence, protection is
impervious to both harmonics and DC transients.

1–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM

Figure 1-1: Functional block diagram

Winding 1 Winding 2

50P 50G
50P
50G
/SG /SG
51P 51P
51G 51G
/SG /SG
50BF 50BF

51_2 51_2

50_2 50_2

50N 50N

51N 51N

49

87G 87G

Calculate Calculate
Restraint Current Differential Currents
345 RELAY

50/87

BLOCK Calculate
Harmonics
2nd and 5th 86
87T

Metering
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
49T
Fault Report

897743A2.CDR

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Table 1-1: ANSI device numbers and functions

ANSI Code 61850 Logical Node Description
49 PTTR1 Thermal Overload
49T rtdGGIO6 Temperature Monitoring
50/87 insPDIF1 Instantaneous Differential
50_2 ngseqPIOC1, Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent
ngseqPIOC2
50BF RBRF1, RBRF2 Breaker Failure
50G/SG gndPIOC1, gndPIOC2/ Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
hsePIOC1, hsePIOC2
50N ndPIOC1, ndPIOC2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
50P phsPIOC1, phsPIOC2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
51_2 ngseqPTOC1, Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent
ngseqPTOC2
51G/SG gndPTOC1, gndPTOC2/ Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent
hsePTOC1, hsePTOC2
51N ndPTOC1, ndPTOC2 Neutral Timed Overcurrent
51P phsPTOC1, phsPTOC2 Phase Timed Overcurrent
86 - Lockout
87G (RGF)1 rgfPDIF1, rgfPDIF2 Restricted Ground Fault
87T pcntPDIF1 Percent Differential
1.Restricted Ground Fault is sometimes coded as “87G”, "REF", "87RGF", "87N", "64R",
"64REF", etc.

Table 1-2: Other device functions

Description
2nd Harmonic Blocking
Ambient Temperature
Breaker Control
Breaker Maintenance
CT Failure Detection
Demand (in metering)
Digital Counters
DNP 3.0 Communications
Event Recorder
Fault Report
IEC 60870-5-103 Communications
IEC 60870-5-104 Communications
IEC 61850 Communications
IEC 61850 GOOSE Communications
Lockout (86)
Logic Elements
Metering: current, frequency, harmonics
Modbus User Map
Modbus RTU Communications
Modbus TCP Communications
Non-volatile Latches
Output Relays
Relay Maintenance

1–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM

Description
Remote Inputs (32)
Setpoint Groups (2)
Test Mode
Transient Recorder (Oscillography)
Trip and Close Coil Monitoring
User Curves
User-programmable LEDs
Virtual Inputs (32)
Virtual Outputs (32)

The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups, with the same set of protection elements.
By default setpoint group 1 will be active. Setpoint group 2 can be activated by
programming the conditions under S4 Control/Change Setpoint Group menu.
Depending on the relay order code, the type and number of protection elements per
setpoint group changes. The full set of protection elements will be available in the setpoint
group, if the “Advanced configuration (letter M) is selected in the order code. This includes
one Transformer Percent Differential element, one Instantaneous Differential element, two
Restricted Ground Fault elements, one Thermal Model, two Breaker Failure elements, two
of each Phase-, Ground-, and Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent elements, two of each
Phase-, Ground-, Neutral Timed Overcurrent elements, and two Negative Sequence Timed
Overcurrent elements. Some of the protection elements are common for the transformer
protection: Percent and Instantaneous differential elements, Thermal Model, and others
are generic with programmable AC inputs from either winding currents: the Restricted
Ground Fault 1(2), the Phase-, Ground-, and Neutral IOC1(2), the Phase, Ground, and
Neutral TOC1(2), and the Negative Sequence TOC1(2) elements.
Figure 1-2: Main menu

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES

COMMANDS A1 STATUS
QUICK SETUP A2 METERING
SETPOINTS A3 RECORDS
MAINTENANCE ٕ
A4 TARGET MESSAGES

897756A3.cdr
QUICK SETUP

RELAY STATUS
SETPOINTS ٕ
S1 RELAY SETUP NOMINAL FREQUENCY
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
S3 PROTECTION
W1 PH CT SECONDARY
ٕ
W1 GND CT PRIMARY
S4 CONTROLS
W1 GND CT SECONDARY
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
S6 MONITORING
W2 PH CT SECONDARY

W2 GND CT PRIMARY
MAINTENANCE
W2 GND CT SECONDARY
M1 RELAY INFO
TRANSFORMER TYPE
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
ٕ XFMR RATED LOAD

M4 BKR MONITOR W1 NOM VOLTAGE

M5 RELAY MAINT W1 GROUNDING

M6 FACTORY SERVICE W2 NOM VOLTAGE

M7 TESTING W2 GROUNDING

XFMR PERCENT DIFF

PH TOC1 FUNCTION

GND TOC1 FUNCTION

PH IOC1 FUNCTION

GND IOC1 FUNCTION

1–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 345 ORDER CODES

345 order codes

The information to specify a 345 relay is provided in the following Order Code figure.
Figure 1-3: Order Codes

345 – * * * * E * N N * * * *
Interface 345 | | | | | | | | | 345 Transformer Protection Relay
User E | | | | | | | | English without programmable LEDs
Interface L | | | | | | | | English with programmable LEDs
Phase Currentsa P0 | | | | | | | 1 A and 5 A configurable phase current inputs
P1 | | | | | | | 1 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
P5 | | | | | | | 5 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
Ground Currentsb G0 | | | | | | 1 A and 5 A configurable ground current input
G1 | | | | | | 1 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
G5 | | | | | | 5 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
S0 | | | | | | 1 A and 5 A configurable sensitive ground current input
S1 | | | | | | 1 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
S5 | | | | | | 5 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
Power Supply L | | | | | 24 to 48 V DC
H | | | | | 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC
Current Protectionc S | | | | Standard: 87T, 87T-50, 51P(1), 51N(1), 51G(1), 50P(1), 50G(1),
| | | | 50N(1), 49P, 46 (51_2/50_2), 86
M | | | | Advanced: 87T, 87T-50, 51P(2), 51N(2), 51G(2), 50P(2), 50G(2),
| | | | 50N(2), 49P, 46 (51_2/50_2)(2), 86, 50BF(2), 87G/RGF(2)
| | Standard: Front USB, Rear RS485: Modbus RTU, DNP3.0,
Communications S N | | IEC60870-5-103
1 E | | Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
| | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104
| | Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
2 E
| | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
| | Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
3 E | | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850
Case Design D | Protection Relay with drawout design
N | Protection Relay with non-drawout design
X | Protection Relay (drawout design) with no chassis
Harsh Environment N None
H Harsh Environment Conformal Coating
a Phase current option “P0” and Ground current option “G0” is only available on the non-drawout version
(Case Design option “N”)
b Ground current options “G0/G1/G5” and “S0/S1/S5” must match the corresponding “P0/P1/P5” Phase currents
The selected phase and ground CTs apply to both windings.
c Current protection option “E” has been discontinued.
897800A6.PDF

Features related to each order number are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:

NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 345 ORDER CODES CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Empty chassis
The 345 protection relay chassis used with a drawout relay is available separately, for use
as a partial replacement or in test environments. Many features are supported by the
cards and ports within the chassis, as is reflected in the chassis order code.
The chassis order code and drawout relay order code must match exactly.
NOTE:

NOTE

A drawout relay cannot be used in a chassis with different order code options.
FASTPATH:

Figure 1-4: 350 chassis order codes

345 – CH – * * * N N * * *
Phase Currents P1 | | | | 1 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
P5 | | | | 5 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
Ground Currentsa G1 | | | 1 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
G5 | | | 5 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
S1 | | | 1 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
S5 | | | 5 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
Communications S N | Standard: Front USB, Rear RS485: Modbus RTU, DNP3.0,
| IEC60870-5-103
| Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
1 E
| Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104
| Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
2 E
| Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
| Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
3 E | Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850
Harsh Environment N None
H Harsh Environment Conformal Coating
a Ground current options “G1/G5” must match the corresponding “P1/P5” Phase currents
897800CH-A1.PDF

Remote Module I/O

The remote RTD Module provides additional protection by monitoring the temperature of
key components in the equipment.

RMIO – * G G * *
Power Supply L | | | | 24 - 48 V DC
H | | | | 110 - 250 V DC / 110 - 230 V AC
I/O Module 1 G | | | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
I/O Module 2 G | | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
I/O Module 3 G | Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
X | None
I/O Module 4 G Remote Module I/O (3 - 100 Ohm Platinum RTDs)
X None
897800RMIO-A1.fm

Accessories
• 18L0-0075 3 Series Depth reducing collar - 1.375”
• 18L0-0076 3 Series Depth reducing collar - 3.00”
• 18L0-0080 3 Series IP20 Kit
• 3S-NDO-STCONKIT 3 Series NDO straight terminal block kit
• 0804-0458 USB A-B configuration cable - 6’

1–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Refer to the 3 Series Retrofit Instruction Manual for the retrofit of Multilin MI, MII, MLJ, and
NOTE:

TOV relays.
NOTE

Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:

NOTE

All accuracies defined below are at nominal frequency (50Hz or 60Hz) unless otherwise
NOTE:

stated.
NOTE

To obtain the element operating time delay, i.e. from fault injection until operation, add the
NOTE:

operate time to the curve time.

NOTE
To obtain the total element operating time, i.e. from the presence of a trip condition to
initiation of a trip, add 8 ms output relay time to the operate times listed below.

Password security
PASSWORD SECURITY
Master Password: ...............................................8 to 10 alpha-numeric characters
Settings Password:.............................................3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Control Password:...............................................3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access

Protection
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIMED OVERCURRENT (51P/51N/51G/
51_2)
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 97% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I < 1 x CT
Curve Shape:......................................................... ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse
Definite Time (0.1 s base curve)
IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse
IAC Extremely/Very/-/Short Inverse
Curve Multiplier:................................................... 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Time: ............................................................ Instantaneous, Linear
Curve Timing Accuracy: .................................. ±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle, whichever is
greater, from pickup to operate
Level Accuracy:.................................................... per CT input

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

SENSITIVE GROUND TIMED OVERCURRENT (51SG)

Pickup Level: ......................................................... 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97% of Pickup @ I > 0.1 x CT
Pickup - 0.002 x CT @ I < 0.1 x CT
Curve Shape:......................................................... ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse
Definite Time
IEC Curve A/B/C/Short
IAC Extremely/Very/-/Short Inverse
Curve Multiplier: .................................................. 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.1
Reset Time: ............................................................ Instantaneous, Linear
Curve Timing Accuracy:.................................. ±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle, whichever is
greater, from pickup to operate
Level Accuracy: ................................................... per CT input
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
(50P/50N/50G/50_2)
Pickup Level: ......................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I <1 x CT
Time Delay: ........................................................... 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
Time Delay Accuracy: ...................................... 1% or 1 cycle, whichever is greater (Time Delay selected)
Level Accuracy: ................................................... per CT input
SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)
Pickup Level (Gnd IOC):..................................... 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97% of Pickup @ I > 0.1 x CT
Pickup - 0.002 x CT @ I < 0.1 x CT
Time Delay: ........................................................... 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
Time Delay Accuracy: ...................................... 1% or 1 cycle, whichever is greater (Time Delay selected)
Level Accuracy: ................................................... per CT input
TRANSFORMER THERMAL PROTECTION (49)
Current:.................................................................... RMS current - max (Ia, Ib, Ic)
Pickup Accuracy: ................................................ per current inputs
Timing Accuracy:................................................ ±3% of expected time, or 30 ms (whichever is greater)
@ I > 1.5 x PKP
TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (87T)
Differential/Restraint Characteristic:......... Dual Slope, Dual Breakpoint
Minimum Pickup Level: .................................... 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Slope 1 Range: .....................................................15 to 100% in steps of 1%
Slope 2 Range: .....................................................50 to 100% in steps of 1%
Kneepoint 1: ..........................................................
0.50 to 4.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Kneepoint 2: ..........................................................
1.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
2nd Harmonic Inhibit Level:............................ 1.0 to 40.0% insteps of 0.1%
2nd Harmonic Inhibit Mode:........................... Per-phase, 2-out-of-3, Average, 1-out-of-3
5th Harmonic Inhibit Level:............................. 1.0 to 40.0% insteps of 0.1%
Dropout Level:......................................................95% of Pickup
Operate Time: ......................................................< 20 ms (no harmonics inhibits selected)
< 30 ms (harmonics inhibits selected)
Level Accuracy: ................................................... per current inputs
TRANSFORMER INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (50/87)
Pickup Level: ......................................................... 3.00 to 20.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 95% of Pickup
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms
Level Accuracy: ................................................... per current inputs

1–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT

Number of Elements: ........................................ 2
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.02 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01
0.002 to 2.000 xCT (with sensitive CTs)
GND Supervision Level: .................................... 0.02 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01
0.002 to 2.000 xCT (with sensitive CTs)
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 97% of Pickup
Slope Range: ......................................................... 0 to 100% in steps of 1
Pickup Delay: ........................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.01
Operate Time:....................................................... < 30 ms @ 0 ms time delay
Level Accuracy:.................................................... per current inputs

Metering
PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
CT Primary: ............................................................1 to 6000 A
Range: ......................................................................0.02 to 20 × CT
Input type:..............................................................1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1G1 or P5G5)
Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0G0)
Nominal frequency: ...........................................50/60 Hz
Burden: ....................................................................<0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy at nominal frequency:.................3%
±10 mA or ±20% of reading from 0.02 to 0.19 × CT, whichever
is greater
CT withstand: ........................................................1 second at 100 A (1 A option)
1 second at 400 A (5 A or universal CT option)
2 seconds at 40 × rated current
continuous at 3 × rated current
SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT INPUT
CT Primary: ............................................................1 to 600 A
Range: ......................................................................0.002 to 3 × CT
Input type:..............................................................1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1S1 or P5S5)
Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0S0)
Nominal frequency: ...........................................50/60 Hz
Burden: ....................................................................<0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy at nominal frequency:.................3%
±10 mA or ±20% of reading from 0.02 to 0.19 × CT, whichever
is greater
CT withstand: ........................................................1 second at 100 A (1 A option)
1 second at 400 A (5 A or universal CT option)
2 seconds at 40 × rated current
continuous at 3 × rated current

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Data capture
TRANSIENT RECORDER
Buffer size: ............................................................. 3 s
No. of buffers:....................................................... 1, 3, 6
No. of channels:................................................... 14
Sampling rate:...................................................... 4, 8, 16, or 32 samples per cycle
Triggers: .................................................................. Manual Command
Contact Input
Virtual Input
Logic Element
Element Pickup/Trip/Dropout/Alarm
Data: ......................................................................... AC input channels
Contact input state
Contact output state
Virtual input state
Logic element state
Data storage:........................................................ RAM - battery backed-up
FAULT RECORDER
Number of records:............................................ 1
Content:................................................................... Date and Time, first cause of fault, phases,
Currents: Ia, Ib, Ib, Ig/Isg, In - magnitudes and angles
Voltages: Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vaux - magnitudes
and angles
System frequency
EVENT RECORDER
Number of events:.............................................. 256
Header:.................................................................... relay name, order code, firmware revision
Content:................................................................... event number, date of event, cause of event,per-phase
current, ground current, sensitive ground current, neutral
current, ground differential current, negative sequence
current, restraint current, per-phase differential current, per-
phase differential second harmonic current, thermal
capacity
Data Storage:........................................................ RAM - battery backed up; retained for 3 days
CLOCK
Setup: ....................................................................... Date and time
Daylight Saving Time
IRIG-B: ...................................................................... Auto-detect (DC shift or Amplitude Modulated)
Amplitude modulated: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift: 1 to 10 V DC
Input impedance: 40 kOhm ± 10%
Accuracy with IRIG-B:....................................... ± 1 ms
Accuracy without IRIG-B:................................± 1 min / month

Control
LOGIC ELEMENTS
Number of logic elements:............................. 16
Trigger source inputs per element: ............ 2 to 8
Block inputs per element: ............................... 2 to 4
Supported operations: ..................................... AND, OR, NOR, NAND, XOR, XNOR, Pickup / Dropout timers
Pickup timer: ......................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Dropout timer:...................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms

1–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

Pickup Level:..........................................................0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ......................................................97 to 98% of pickup
Timer 1 Delay: ......................................................0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timer 2 Delay: ......................................................0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay Accuracy: ......................................0 to 1 cycle (Timer 1, Timer 2)
Level Accuracy:....................................................per CT input
Reset Time: ............................................................<14 ms typical at 2 x pickup at 60 Hz
<16 ms typical at 2 x pickup at 50 Hz
LOCKOUT
Function: .................................................................Latch Trip command to Relay 1 TRIP
Block Close to Relay 2 CLOSE
Operation:...............................................................Any protection element
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
High Temperature Pickup: ..............................20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C
Low Temperature Pickup: ...............................-40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C
Time Delay:............................................................1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Temperature Dropout:......................................Configurable 90 to 98% of pickup
Temperature Accuracy: ...................................±10°C
Timing Accuracy:................................................±1 second

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Monitoring
BREAKER HEALTH
Timer Accuracy:.................................................. ± 3% of delay setting or ± 1 cycle (whichever is greater) from
pickup to operate

DEMAND
Measured Values: ............................................... Phase A/B/C present and maximum current
Measurement Type:........................................... Thermal Exponential, 90% response time (programmed): 5,
10, 15, 20, 30 minutes
Block Interval / Rolling Demand, time interval (programmed):
5, 10, 15, 20, 30 minutes
Current Pickup Level: ........................................ 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 A
Dropout Level:...................................................... 96-98% of Pickup level
Level Accuracy: ................................................... ± 2%
RTD (49T)
Pickup:...................................................................... 1 to 250oC in steps of 1oC
Pickup Hysteresis: .............................................. 2oC
Time Delay: ........................................................... 3 sec
Elements: ................................................................ Trip and Alarm
RTD TROUBLE ALARM(49T)
RTD Trouble Alarm: ............................................ <-50oC or >250oC

Inputs
CONTACT INPUTS
Inputs: ...................................................................... 10
Selectable thresholds: ...................................... 17, 33, 84, 166 VDC
±10%
Recognition time:................................................ 1/2 cycle
Debounce time: ................................................... 1 to 64 ms, selectable, in steps of 1 ms
Maximum input voltage & continuous
current draw:................................................... 300 VDC, 2 mA, connected to Class 2 source
Type: ......................................................................... opto-isolated inputs
External switch: ................................................... wet contact
RTD INPUTS
RTD Type:................................................................ 100 Ohm platinum (DIN.43760)
RTD Sensing Current: ........................................ 5 mA
Isolation: ................................................................. 2 kV from base unit (RMIO only)
Distance: ................................................................. 250 m maximum
Range:...................................................................... -50 to +250oC
Accuracy: ............................................................... ±3oC
Lead Resistance: ................................................. 25 Ohm max per lead
RTD Trouble Alarm: ............................................ <-50 or >250oC
RTD Inputs Available: ........................................ 12 maximum with the RMIO option connected

1–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Outputs
FORM-A RELAYS
Configuration:....................................................... 2 (two) electromechanical
Contact material: ................................................ silver-alloy
Operate time:........................................................ <8 ms
Continuous current:........................................... 10 A
Make and carry for 0.2s:.................................. 30 A per ANSI C37.90
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):................. 24 V / 1 A
48 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.3 A
250 V / 0.2 A
Break (DC resistive):............................................ 24 V / 10 A
48 V / 6 A
125 V / 0.5 A
250 V / 0.3 A
Break (AC inductive): .......................................... 720 VA @ 240 VAC Pilot duty A300
Break (AC resistive): ............................................ 250 VAC / 10 A
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage:............................................. 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle current:...................................................... 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-C RELAYS
Configuration:....................................................... 5 (five) electromechanical
Contact material: ................................................ silver-alloy
Operate time:........................................................ <8 ms
Continuous current:........................................... 10 A
Make and carry for 0.2s:.................................. 30 A per ANSI C37.90
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):................. 24 V / 1 A
48 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.3 A
250 V / 0.2 A
Break (DC resistive):............................................ 24 V / 10 A
48 V / 6 A
125 V / 0.5 A
250 V / 0.3 A
Break (AC inductive): .......................................... 720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
Break (AC resistive): ............................................ 277 VAC / 10 A
TRIP SEAL-IN
Relay 1 trip seal-in: ............................................ 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Relay 2 trip seal-in: ............................................ 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01

Power supply
HIGH RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:..................................................................120 to 240 VAC
125 to 250 VDC
Range: ......................................................................60 to 300 VAC (50 and 60 Hz)
84 to 250 VDC
Ride-through time: .............................................35 ms
LOW RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:..................................................................24 to 48 VDC
Range: ......................................................................20 to 60 VDC

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

ALL RANGES
Voltage withstand: ............................................. 2 × highest nominal voltage for 10 ms
Power consumption: ......................................... 15 W nominal, 20 W maximum
20 VA nominal, 40 VA maximum
Fuse rating:............................................................ 5A fuse; time lag, slow blow, 350V 4.5 O.D. X 14.5mm

Communications
SERIAL
RS485 port: ............................................................ Opto-coupled
Baud rates: ............................................................ up to 115 kbps
Response time: .................................................... 1 ms typical
Parity: ....................................................................... None, Odd, Even
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
Maximum distance: ........................................... 1200 m (4000 feet)
Isolation: ................................................................. 2 kV

ETHERNET (COPPER)
Modes: ..................................................................... 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector: ............................................................. RJ-45
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE,
IEC 61850

ETHERNET (FIBER)
Fiber type: .............................................................. 100 MB Multi-mode
Wavelength:.......................................................... 1300 nm
Connector: ............................................................. MTRJ
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE,
IEC 61850
Transmit power: .................................................. -20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity: ........................................... -31 dBm
Power budget:...................................................... 9 dB
Maximum input power:.................................... -11.8 dBm
Typical distance: ................................................. 2 km (1.25 miles)
Duplex:..................................................................... half/full
Product type: ........................................................ Class 1 Laser product
USB
Standard specification:.................................... Compliant with USB 2.0
Data transfer rate: ............................................. 115 kbps

1–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Testing and certification

TYPE TESTS

TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL

Dielectric voltage withstand
(high voltage power supply*) 60255-27 2200 VAC for one second
(low voltage power supply*) 60255-27 550 VAC for one second
* Test level is based on basic insulation principle (Power supply I/P terminals tested to Chassis
ground).
Impulse voltage withstand EN60255-27 5 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 / IEC61000-4-18 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-2 15 kV / 8 kV
RF immunity IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz - 1 GHz,
1.4 GHz - 2.7 GHz,
10 V/m
Fast Transient Disturbance IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV / 4 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-5 0.5, 1 & 2 kV
Conducted RF Immunity IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz - 80 MHz,
26 MHz - 68MHz,
10V/m
Voltage interruption and Ripple DC IEC 60255-26 / IEC 60255-4-11 15% ripple, 200ms
interrupts
Radiated & Conducted Emissions CISPR11 / CISPR22/ Class A
IEC 60255-26: Section 7.1.2 & 7.1.3
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2
Power magnetic Immunity IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-8 1000 A/m, 100 A/m,
30A/m 300 A/m
Voltage Dip & interruption IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips, 250/
300 cycle interrupts
Power frequency IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-16 Level 4
Voltage Ripple IEC 60255-26 / IEC 61000-4-17 15% ripple
Ingress Protection IEC 60529 IP54 front
Environmental (Cold) IEC 60068-2-1 -40°C 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat) IEC 60068-2-2 85°C 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic IEC 60068-2-30 6 day variant 2
EFT IEEE / ANSI C37.90.1 4KV, 2.5Khz
Damped Oscillatory IEEE / ANSI C37.90.1 2.5KV, 1Mhz
RF Immunity IEEE / ANSI C37.90.2 35V/m (max field),
(80 MHz-1 GHz with 1 KHz
sine and 80% AM
modulation)
ESD IEEE / ANSI C37.90.3 8KV CD/ 15KV AD
UL 508 e83849 NKCR
Safety UL C22.2-14 e83849 NKCR7
UL 1053 e83849 NKCR

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

APPROVALS

Applicable Council Directive According to:

Low voltage directive 2014/35/EU
CE compliance EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
UL 508
North America cULus UL 1053
C22.2. No 14
EAC Machines and Equipment TR CU 010/2011
Lloyd’s Register Rules and Regulations for the Marine Applications: ENV2, ENV3
Classifications of Ships
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 Certificate Level B IEC 61850-10
ISO Manufactured under a registered ISO9001
quality program

EAC
The EAC Technical Regulations (TR) for Machines and Equipment apply to the Customs
Union (CU) of the Russian Federation, Belarus, and Kazakhstan.

Item Description
Country of origin Spain or Canada; see label on the unit
Date of manufacture See label on the side of the unit
Declaration of Conformity and/or Certificate of Available upon request
Conformity

Physical
DIMENSIONS
Refer to Chapter 2 for details
NOTE:

NOTE NON-DRAWOUT UNIT

Height: ..................................................................... 7.98” (202.7 mm)
Width:....................................................................... 6.23” (158.2 mm)
Length:..................................................................... 9.35” (237.5 mm)
DRAWOUT UNIT
Height: ..................................................................... 7.93” (201.51 mm)
Width:....................................................................... 6.62” (138.2 mm)
Length:..................................................................... 9.62” (244.2 mm)

WEIGHT
NON-DRAWOUT UNIT
Weight (net): .......................................................... 2.9 kg (6.4 lbs)
Weight (gross): ..................................................... 4.0 kg (8.6 lbs)
DRAWOUT UNIT
Weight (net): .......................................................... 3.9 kg (8.6 lbs)
Weight (gross): ..................................................... 5.0 kg (11.0 lbs)

1–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Ambient temperatures:
Storage/Shipping: -40oC to 85oC
Operating: -40oC to 60oC

Humidity: Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55oC (As

per IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2, 6 days)

Altitude: 2000 m (max)

Pollution Degree: II
Overvoltage Category: III
Ingress Protection: IP54 Front, IP20 cover (optional)
Noise: 0 dB

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

1–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 2: Installation

Installation

Mechanical installation
This section describes the mechanical installation of the 345 system, including dimensions
for mounting and information on module withdrawal and insertion.

Dimensions
The dimensions of the 345 are on the following pages. Additional dimensions for mounting
and panel cutouts are shown in the following sections.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Figure 2-1: 345 dimensions - Drawout unit


>PP@

107
>76PP@


>PP@


>PP@
+$1'/(1(('672%(527$7('
:+,/(6/,',1*7+('5$:287
81,7,172&$37,9(81,7

 
>PP@ >PP@


>PP@

2–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-2: 345 dimensions - Non-drawout unit

3.96"
(100.6mm)

."
(.mm)

7.88"
(200.2mm)

1.47"
(37.3mm)

7.98" 6.82"
(202.7mm) (173.2mm)

6.23"
(158.2mm)

Product identification
The product identification label is located on the side panel of the 345 . This label indicates
the product model, serial number, and date of manufacture.
Figure 2-3: 345 Product label

g
Technical Support:
Multilin 345 Worldwide: +1 905 927 7070
Transformer Protection System North America: 1 800 547 8629
Model : 345-E-P1-G1-H-E-S-N-N-2E-N-N www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/
Serial Number: ML1A16000098 650 Markland Street, Markham
ON, Canada L6C 0M1
ML1A160000988 MFG. Date: Mar. 11, 2016
E83849
Power Supply:
125-250V 20W UL
~
120-240V 50/60Hz 36VA
Output Ratings: 125 VDC BREAK 0.3A
C R

LISTED
US
MADE IN
IND. CONT. EQ.
Input Ratings: 300 VDC @ 2mA CANADA 52TL
Instruction Manual: GEK-113568
Pollution Degree 2 / Degré de pollution 2 ML1A160000988U
The pink color text (i.e. Model, Serial Number, Instruction Manual, MFG. Date) is for reference
NOTE:

only. The text can vary.

NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Mounting

Standard panel mount The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.
To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
CAUTION:

mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.

Figure 2-4: Standard panel mounting - Drawout

8 - 32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK
GE PART # 1408-0306; (QTY:8)
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB

2–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-5: Standard Panel mounting - Non-drawout

8-32 x 3/8" P/HD PHIL BLK

GE P/N 1408-0306 (QTY:8)
Tightening Torque: 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm)

Panel with Cutout

NDO unit

Figure 2-6: Depth Reducing collar (optional)

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Panel mounting with depth reducing collar:

1. Mount the collar of required depth (1.375” or 3”) to the unit (captive or non-drawout)
using 4 screws (see above).
2. Mount the combination of unit and collar to the panel using 4 screws as shown above.
Figure 2-7: Mounting tabs (optional)

“V” TABS

BOTTOM TAB

1. From the front of the panel, slide the empty case into the cutout until the bottom tab
clicks into place (see above).
2. From the rear of the panel screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions
shown above.
3. If added security is required, bend the retaining "V"tabs outward, to about 90°. These
tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown above.
The relay can now be inserted and can be panel wired.

2–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-8: Panel cutout dimensions

5.350” ±0.010”
(135.9 mm ±0.25mm)

4.100” ±0.010”
(104.1 mm ±0.25 mm)

CL
Φ 0.200”
(5.1 mm)

6.900” ±0.010”
(175.3 mm ±0.25 mm)

6.000” ±0.010”

CL (152.4 mm ±0.25 mm)

4.000” ±0.010”
(101.6 mm ±0.25 mm)

Figure 2-9: RMIO - DIN rail mounting - Base & Expansion units
SNAP-IN THE DIN CLIPS (QTY: 4)
FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING
0.30”
(7,6 mm)

1.38”
(35,1 mm)

DIN 3 RAIL

853726A1.CDR

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Figure 2-10: RMIO - Base Unit screw mounting

MEETS VIBRATION REQUIREMENT OF

IEC 60255 SEC 21.1, 21.2, & 21.3

2.250”
(57,15 mm)

#6 -32 THREADED HOLE

QTY: 2

4.100”
(104,14 mm)

853727A1.CDR

Figure 2-11: RMIO - Expansion Unit screw mounting

0.356”
[9.03 mm]

0.672”
2.285” [17.06 mm]
[58.04 mm]

EXPANSION UNIT
OUTLINE

#6-32 THREADED HOLE

QTY: 2 1.500”
[38.10 mm]

#6-32X1/2 FT FLAT HEAD PHIL ZINC 853755A1.cdr

QTY: 2; (SUPPLIED); GE PART # 1406-0117
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 10 lb. in.

2–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion

Figure 2-12: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram

8 - 32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK

GE PART # 1408-0306; (QTY:8)
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB

THE HANDLE MUST BE ROTATED 90⁰

WHILE SLIDING THE DRAW-OUT
UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT

PUSH THE HANDLE DOWN AND TIGHTEN

KEEP THE HANDLE IN ITS ROTATED THE SCREW UNTIL THE HANDLE IS PARALLEL
POSITION UNTIL THE DRAW-OUT UNIT WITH THE FRONT PANEL SURFACE
IS INSERTED COMPLETELY

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

IP20 Cover (optional)

The IP20 cover minimizes potential dangers to users by preventing finger contact with
electrical connections at the back of the 3 Series drawout units.
Attaching the cover
The steps for attaching the IP20 cover (optional) to the drawout unit are as follows:
Figure 2-13: IP20 Cover mounting - Drawout unit only

1. Place 4 custom standoffs (item#1) using the suggested tightening torque of 8lb-in in
the following order:
A. Remove the 2 mounting screws near letters A and C, of label ABC (item#2), and
mount 2 standoffs.
B. Remove the 2 mounting screws near the letters B and E, of label ABCDE (item#3),
and mount 2 standoffs.
2. Place the IP20 cover (item#4) and secure it with 4 screws (item#5) using the suggested
tightening torque of 8lb-in.
Make sure the device terminals are wired before placing the cover. Use the 5 slots located
NOTE:

on each side of the cover to guide the wires outside of the cover.
NOTE
Retrofit kit for IP20
Before attaching the cover, remove the old labels from the device (see item#2 and item#3)
and replace them with the new labels from the retrofit kit. Attach the cover as described in
the previous section.

2–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Electrical installation
This section describes the electrical installation of the 345 system, including typical wiring
diagrams and terminal identification.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Typical Wiring Diagrams

Figure 2-14: Typical wiring diagram – Drawout
TWO WINDING
TRANSFORMER

WINDING 1

WINDING 2
B
C

E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12

IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG

POWER SUPPLY
+ CONTROL

+
B1

345 - A1 - POWER
Transformer Protection System chassis
gnd B2

Winding 1 Breaker 52a C1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1)

Aux Contacts GND STUD GROUND
52b C2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2) BUS
52a C3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3)
Winding 2 Breaker +
A2 TRIP CIRCUIT
Aux Contacts 52b C4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4) TRIP
1 TRIP W1 BKR
DIGITAL INPUTS

B3 COIL
C5 INPUT 5 52a
V A3 W1 BKR
C6 INPUT 6
B4 + TRIP CIRCUIT
C7 INPUT 7 TRIP
2 TRIP A4 W2 BKR
C8 INPUT 8 COIL
52a
V B5 W2 BKR
C9 INPUT 9
A5
C10 INPUT 10
3 AUXILIARY B6
C11 COMMON
A6
C12 CHASSIS GND
B7
Front Panel 4 AUXILIARY A7 OUTPUT CONTACTS
USB B8 SHOWN WITH NO
TYPE B
A8 CONTROL POWER
USB 5 AUXILIARY B9
A9
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel B10
ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 6 AUXILIARY A10
RJ45 mTRJ
IRIG-B RS485 B11

4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX
- + - + 7 CRITICAL A11
FAILURE B12
OPTIONAL F2 F1 F5 F4 F3 F6 RELAY A12

GROUND
BUS

897744.CDR

2–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-15: Typical wiring diagram - Non-drawout

TWO WINDING
TRANSFORMER

WINDING 1

WINDING 2
B
C

E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12

IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG

POWER SUPPLY
+ CONTROL

+
L

345 - N - POWER
Transformer Protection System chassis
gnd

Winding 1 Breaker 52a B1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1)

Aux Contacts GND STUD GROUND
52b B2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2) BUS
Winding 2 Breaker 52a B3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3)
+
A1 TRIP CIRCUIT
Aux Contacts 52b B4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4) TRIP
1 TRIP W1 BKR
DIGITAL INPUTS

A2 COIL
B5 INPUT 5 52a
V A3 W1 BKR
B6 INPUT 6
A4 + TRIP CIRCUIT
B7 INPUT 7 TRIP
2 TRIP A5 W2 BKR
B8 INPUT 8 COIL
52a
V A6 W2 BKR
B9 INPUT 9
A7
B10 INPUT 10
3 AUXILIARY A8
B11 COMMON
A9
B12 CHASSIS GND
A10
Front Panel 4 AUXILIARY A11 OUTPUT CONTACTS
USB A12 SHOWN WITH NO
TYPE B
A13 CONTROL POWER
USB 5 AUXILIARY A14
A15
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel A16
ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 6 AUXILIARY A17
RJ45 mTRJ
IRIG-B RS485 A18

4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX
- + - + 7 CRITICAL A19
FAILURE A20
OPTIONAL C2 C1 C5 C4 C3 C6 RELAY A21

GROUND
BUS

897745.CDR

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

345 Terminal identification

When installing two lugs on one terminal, both lugs should be "right side up" as shown in
NOTE:

the picture below. This is to ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere
NOTE with the lug body.

Figure 2-16: Orient the lugs correctly...

SCREW

1 2 3
WASHER

TERMINAL LOWER
BLOCK TERMINAL
DIVIDER

Figure 2-17: CORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD

2–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-18: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed)

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Figure 2-19: Terminal Identification - Drawout

F
1 IRIG-B +
POWER SUPPLY + 1 INPUT 1 2 IRIG-B -
1 POWER SUPPLY - 3 RS485 +
CHASSIS GND 2 INPUT 2 4 RS485 -
2 W1 TRIP N/O 5 RS485 COM
W1 TRIP COM 6 CHASSIS GND
3 INPUT 3 7 RESERVED
3 W1 TRIP OPTV 8 RESERVED
W2 TRIP N/O 4 INPUT 4
4 W2 TRIP COM
W2 TRIP OPTV 5
■W1 PHASE A CT 5
5 AUX 3 N/C INPUT 5 W1 PHASE A CT
AUX 3 COM 6 ■W1 PHASE B CT 6
6 AUX 3 N/O INPUT 6 W1 PHASE B CT
AUX 4 N/C 7 INPUT 7
■W1 PHASE C CT 7
7 AUX 4 COM W1 PHASE C CT
AUX 4 N/O 8 INPUT 8 ■W1 GND CT 8
8 AUX 5 N/C W1 GND CT
AUX 5 COM 9 INPUT 9 ■W2 PHASE A CT 9
9 AUX 5 N/O W2 PHASE A CT
AUX 6 N/C 10 INPUT 10 ■W2 PHASE B CT 10
10 AUX 6 COM W2 PHASE B CT
AUX 6 N/O 11 INPUT COM ■W2 PHASE C CT 11
11 CRIT FAIL N/C W2 PHASE C CT
CRIT FAIL COM 12 ■W2 GND CT 12
12 CRIT FAIL N/O CHASSIS GND W2 GND CT

A B C D E

2–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-20: Terminal Identification - Non-drawout

1 INPUT 1
POWER SUPPLY + 2 INPUT 2
POWER SUPPLY - 3 INPUT 3
CHASSIS GND
4 INPUT 4
5 INPUT 5
6 INPUT 6
1 W1 TRIP N/O 7 INPUT 7
W1 TRIP COM 2 8 INPUT 8
3 W1 TRIP OPTV 9 INPUT 9
W2 TRIP N/O 4 10 INPUT 10
5 W2 TRIP COM 11 INPUT COM
W2 TRIP OPTV 6 12 CHASSIS GND
7 AUX 3 N/C
AUX 3 COM 8
9 AUX 3 N/O
AUX 4 N/C 10
11 AUX 4 COM W1 PHASE A CT ■ 5
AUX 4 N/O 12 5 W1 PHASE A CT
13 AUX 5 N/C W1 PHASE B CT ■ 6
AUX 5 COM 14
15 AUX 5 N/O 6 W1 PHASE B CT
AUX 6 N/C 16 W1 PHASE C CT ■ 7
17 AUX 6 COM 7 W1 PHASE C CT
AUX 6 N/O 18 W1 GND CT ■ 8
19 CRIT FAIL N/C W1 GND CT
CRIT FAIL COM 20 8
21 CRIT FAIL N/O W2 PHASE A CT ■ 9
9 W2 PHASE A CT
W2 PHASE B CT ■ 10
10 W2 PHASE B CT
1 IRIG-B + W2 PHASE C CT ■ 11
2 IRIG-B - 11 W2 PHASE C CT
3 RS485 + W2 GND VT ■ 12
4 RS485 - 12 W2 GND VT
5 RS485 COM
6 CHASSIS GND
7 RESERVED
8 RESERVED

Wire range
Use the following guideline when selecting wires or lugs to connect to terminal blocks
A,B,C,D,E (Drawout case design), and terminal blocks D,E (Non-drawout case design):
• 12 AWG to 22 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without
9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals.
• 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with matching
wire sizes and stranding. Two wires maximum per circuit.
• 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.53 mm
(0.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit.
• Suggested wiring screw tightening torque, tighten to 12 in-lb (1.35 N-m).
• The uncovered communications cable shield connected to the common terminal
should not exceed 1” (2.5 cm) for proper EMC shielding of the communications cable.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

RMIO module installation

Although the RMIO is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it
should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic
fields.
Figure 2-21: RMIO unit showing 2 IO_G modules

Figure 2-22: RMIO terminal identification with 4 IO_G modules

PSU RCU IO_G IO_G IO_G IO_G

14 14 14 14
L 13 13 13 13
P S U

N 12 12 12 12
G 11 11 11 11
10 10 10 10
Tx 9 9 9 9
Rx 8 8 8 8
7 7 7 7
6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
Com Port

+ B1
- B2 4 4 4 4
Common B3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

896750.cdr

2–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2-23: RMIO wiring diagram

To switchgear
ground bus
– +

3 Series IED RMIO N L

ZT (*) SHIELD TWISTED PAIR
B1 RMIO + Control power
F7: RMIO+ OPTOCOUPLER
OPTOCOUPLER
F8: RMIO- B2 RMIO -
DATA
DATA F5: COM

SCADA, PLC, OR B3 COMMON

PERSONAL COMPUTER

GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE 896740A1.CDR

SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR THE MM300 ONLY

(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END

(typically 120 ohms and 1 nF)

F5, F7, and F8 refer to terminals shown on the above 345 Terminal Identification diagrams.
NOTE:

NOTE

Phase sequence and transformer polarity

For correct operation of the relay features, the user must follow the instrument
transformer polarities, shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. Note the solid square
markings shown with all instrument transformer connections. The phase sequence is user
programmable for either ABC or ACB rotation.

Current inputs
The 345 relay has eight (8) channels for AC current inputs, each with an isolating
transformer. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current
transformers with 1 to 6000 A primaries may be used.
Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating
CAUTION:

of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate
protection.

IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs will correctly measure up to 20
CAUTION:

times the current input’s nominal rating. Time overcurrent curves become horizontal
lines for currents above the 20 × CT rating. This becomes apparent if the pickup level is
set above the nominal CT rating.

Before working on CTs, they MUST be short circuited.

CAUTION:

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs

Two ground inputs - one per winding - are referred to throughout this manual as the
Ground Current or Sensitive Ground Current inputs. Before making ground connections,
consider that the relay automatically calculates the neutral (residual) current from the sum
of the three phase current phasors. The following figures show three possible ground
connections (or three possible sensitive ground connections).
The ground inputs (Terminals D8 and E8 for W1, and D12 and E12 for W2) are used in
conjunction with a Zero Sequence CT as source, or in the neutral of wye-connected source
CTs. When using the residual connection set the GROUND CT PRIMARY setpoint to a value
equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint.
In cases where the relay is equipped with sensitive ground CT (terminals D8 and E8 for W1,
and D12 and E12 for W2) the sensitive ground current input is intended for use with a CT in
a source neutral of a high-impedance grounded system, or on ungrounded systems. On
ungrounded systems it is connected residually with the phase current inputs. In this case,
the SENSTV GND CT PRIMARY setpoint should be programmed to a value equal to the
PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint. The sensitive ground current input can be connected to a
Zero Sequence CT for increased sensitivity and accuracy when physically possible in the
system.
The Sensitive Ground input must only be used on systems where the maximum ground
NOTE:

current does not exceed current input specification.

NOTE
The ground CT wiring in the figure below, shows 3 possible ways for wiring the Winding 1
ground CT (terminals D8, E8). The Winding 2 ground CT wiring (terminals D12, E12) is similar.
Figure 2-24: Ground/Sensitive Ground wiring

Transformer Winding 1
A

E5 E6 E7 345
A B C PHASE CURRENT
D5 D6 D7 INPUTS

D8 E8 E8 D8 E8 D8

N IG IG N IG N

GROUND GROUND GROUND

GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT

WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT WITH RESIDUAL CONNECTION

897730A1.CDR

For Winding 2 ground CT, use relay terminals D12-E12 in the same wiring configuration as
shown above for Winding 1.

2–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Zero sequence CT installation

The various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT, for ground
fault current detection, are shown in the figure below. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero
Sequence CT is recommended.
Figure 2-25: Zero sequence core balance (CT) installation

UNSHIELDED CABLE SHIELDED CABLE

Ground connection to neutral
Stress cone
Source must be on the source side Source shields
A B C N G A B C

Ground
outside CT

To ground;
LOAD must be on
load side

LOAD 898733.CDR

Control power
Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. If the
CAUTION:

applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur. All grounds MUST be
connected for safe, normal operation regardless of control power supply type.

The label found on the relay specifies its order code or model number. The installed power
supply’s operating range will be one of the following:
LO: 24 to 48 V DC (Range: 20 to 60 V DC)
HI: 125 to 250 V DC/120 to 240 V AC (Range: 84 to 250 V DC/60 to 300 V AC (50 and 60
Hz))
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest practical
CAUTION:

path. A tinned copper, braided, shielding and bonding cable should be used. As a
minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. Belden catalog number 8660
is suitable.

Isolate power prior to servicing.

CAUTION:

An external switch, circuit breaker, or other protective device must be connected near to
NOTE:

the equipment.
NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Figure 2-26: Control power connection

+
CONTROL
POWER
-

HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR

OR BRAIDED WIRE

SWITCHGEAR
GROUND BUS

B2 A1 B1

GROUND
CHASSIS
- +
CONTROL
POWER

RELAY

898735.CDR

Contact inputs
External contacts can be connected to the relay’s ten (10) digital inputs. These contacts are
wet only.
The inputs can be programmed to different thresholds depending on the DC voltage (17,
33, 84, 166).
Ensure correct polarity on contact input connections and do not connect any contact
CAUTION:

input circuits to ground or else relay hardware may be damaged.

A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power
supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In
addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay’s DC
negative rail at Terminal C11. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement
is 300 V DC.
Figure 2-27: Wet contact connections
Wet Contact Connection
36(5,(6 RELAY

Contact Input 1 C1

V DC Power
Supply
Contact Input Common C11
LOGICIN.CDR

2–22 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Trip1 and Trip2 output relays

The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays
designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip, four general purpose
relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6), and a Critical Failure relay. The special purpose relays have
fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the
user.
Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the
circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
• The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the
command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays, it
will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a
breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
• If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
• If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a contact
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets.
• If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time, then this delay is added to
the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.

52a Contact 52b Contact Relay Operation

Configured Configured
Yes Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker.
Yes No Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an
open breaker.
No Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker.
No No Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay
expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets.

Breaker monitoring (Trip coil monitoring) is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on

Form A output relays: #1 Trip, and #2 Trip. The voltage monitor is connected across each of
the two Form A contacts, and the relay effectively detects healthy current through the
circuit. In order to do this, an external jumper must be connected between terminals A2
and A3 for #1 Trip coil monitoring, or/and B4, and B5 for #2 Trip coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a high
resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and
“MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figures below show the two different connections of the breaker Trip coil to
the relay’s trip output #1 terminals (output #2 Trip coil monitoring) for both no voltage
monitoring and voltage monitoring of the trip circuit integrity.
To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals A2 and B3 to connect the
NOTE:

Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals A2 (optional voltage) and A3.
NOTE

To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals B4 and A4 to connect the
NOTE:

Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals B4 (optional voltage) and B5.
NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

Figure 2-28: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with no voltage monitoring
DC + DC +

Output Relay 1 (TRIP) Output Relay 2 (TRIP)

A2 B4

B3 A4
V V
A3 B5

52a 52a
contact contact

Trip Trip
Coil Coil

897785.cdr
DC - DC -

All AUX contacts are shown when the breaker is open.

NOTE:

NOTE

Figure 2-29: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with voltage monitoring
DC + DC +

Output Relay 1 (TRIP) Output Relay 2 (TRIP)

External External
A2 jumper B4 jumper

B3 A4
V V
A3 B5

52a 52a
contact contact

Trip Trip
Coil Coil

897786.cdr
DC - DC -

2–24 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Serial communications
Figure 2-30: RS485 wiring diagram

TWISTED PAIR
3 Series IED
Z T (*) SHIELD
F3 RS485 +
OPTOCOUPLER OPTOCOUPLER
F4 RS485 -
DATA
DATA COM

SCADA, PLC, OR F5 COMMON

PERSONAL COMPUTER

GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE

SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR THE SR3 ONLY IED
RS485 +
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END RS485 -
(typically 120 ohms and 1 nF)

COMMON

UP TO 32 350
OR OTHER IEDs, IED
MAXIMUM CABLE
LENGTH OF
1200 m (4000 ft.) Z T (*)
RS485 +
RS485 -

LAST
COMMON DEVICE
898738A3.CDR

One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Up to 32 345 IEDs can be daisy-chained together on
a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems,
additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters can also be
used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Suitable cable should have a
characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (for example, Belden #9841) and total wire length
should not exceed 1200 meters (4000 ft.). Commercially available repeaters will allow for
transmission distances greater than 1200 meters.
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon.
For this reason, surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals.
Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent
noise coupling.
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative
CAUTION:

that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only
once, at the master or at the 345 . Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed
communications.

The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices
installed, either internally or externally. Ground the shield at one point only, as shown in
the figure above, to avoid ground loops.
Correct polarity is also essential. The 345 IEDs must be wired with all the positive (+)
terminals connected together and all the negative (–) terminals connected together. Each
relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configurations.
The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼
watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals.
Observing these guidelines will ensure a reliable communication system immune to
system transients.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

The uncovered communications cable shield connected to the common terminal should
not exceed 1” (2.5 cm) for proper EMC shielding of the communications cable.

IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be
synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats
are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shift or amplitude
modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the 345 relay. Third party
equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic
locations can also be synchronized.
The uncovered communications cable shield connected to the common terminal should
not exceed 1” (2.5 cm) for proper EMC shielding of the communications cable.
Figure 2-31: IRIG-B connection

GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL

IRIG-B GE MULTILIN
TIME CODE RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE 3 SERIES RELAY
GENERATOR
+ F1 IRIG-B(+)

(DC SHIFT OR RECEIVER

AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
– F2 IRIG-B(-)

898741A3.CDR

TO OTHER DEVICES

2–26 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 3: Interfaces

Interfaces

There are two methods of interfacing with the 345 Feeder Protection System.
• Interfacing via the relay keypad and display.
• Interfacing via the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software.
This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods available with the 345 using
the relay control panels and EnerVista 3 Series Setup software. For additional details on
interface parameters (for example, settings, actual values, etc.), refer to the individual
chapters.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Front control panel interface

Figure 3-1: Transformer Protection System Front Panel

GE Multilin
SR345 Transformer
Protection System

IN SERVICE TRIP W1 BREAKER OPEN

TROUBLE ALARM W1 BREAKER CLOSED

SETPOINT
GROUP 1 PICKUP W2 BREAKER OPEN
SETPOINT
GROUP 2 MAINTENANCE W2 BREAKER CLOSED

△ ▲ MENU

◁ ▷ ENTER

▼
ESCAPE

▽ RESET

USB

897351A1.cdr

3–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE

Figure 3-2: 345 Feeder Protection System Front Panel - Programmable LEDs

GE Multilin
345 Transformer
Protection System

IN SERVICE

TROUBLE

TRIP

ALARM

୞ ̵ MENU

ඓ ඕ ENTER
ESCAPE

ୠ ̷
RESET

USB

897841A1.cdr

Description
The relay front panel provides an interface with a liquid crystal display, LED status
indicators, control keys, and a USB program port. The display and status indicators show
the relay information automatically. The control keys are used to select the appropriate
message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. The USB program port is
also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista 3 Series
Setup software.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Display
The 80-character liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under varied lighting
conditions. When the keypad and display are not being used, system information is
displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the Menu key during the
display of default message returns the display to the last message shown before the
default message appeared. Any trip, alarm, or pickup is displayed immediately,
automatically overriding the default message.

Working with the The 345 display messages are organized into a Main Menu, pages, and sub-pages. There
Keypad are four main menus labeled Actual Values, Quick Setup, Setpoints, and Maintenance.
Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the five Main Menu
headers, which appear in sequence as follows:
Figure 3-3: The five Main Menu headers
ACTUAL VALUES
COMMANDS
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
Pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display
the corresponding menu Page. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys to scroll through
the Page headers.
Figure 3-4: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection

ACTUAL VALUES
△ A1 STATUS
▶
█ A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
Back
▶ 1 click
█ CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
A3 RECORDS OUTPUT RELAYS
▽ Back
▼

◁ ▷
▼
2 clicks

A1 STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
█ OUTPUT RELAYS

Back
▼

◁ ▷
▼
Click to end

A1 STATUS
..
.
█ LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY

3–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE

When the display shows SETPOINTS, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key will
display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as setpoints in the
manual). When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the
ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual
values in the manual).
Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. The MESSAGE ▲
and MESSAGE ▼ keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. A summary of the
setpoints and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Setpoints and Actual
Values, respectively.
The ENTER key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered
setpoint values into memory to complete the change. The MESSAGE ► key can also be
used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered setpoints.
The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose. It is used to exit the sub-pages and to cancel a
setpoint change. The MESSAGE ◄ key can also be used to exit sub-pages and to cancel
setpoint changes.
The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setpoint.
They also decrement and increment numerical setpoints.
The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. This includes
resetting latched output relays, latched Trip LEDs, breaker operation failure, and trip / close
coil failures. The Autoreclose Scheme is also reset with the shot counter being returned to
zero and the lockout condition being cleared.
The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay.
Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring
elements that are picked up, operating, or latched.

LED status indicators - Front panel with non-programmable LEDs

• IN SERVICE: Green
This LED will be continuously “ON”, when the relay is set to “Ready” under S1 RELAY
SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS, and no major self-test errors have been
detected.
• TROUBLE: Orange
This LED will turn “ON”, when the relay is in the not programmed (Not Ready) state
under S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS, or upon detection of a major
self-test error. The relay will turn back to “IN-SERVICE” if no major self-test error is
present.
• SETPOINT GROUP 1, 2: Green
These LEDs indicate the group of active protection elements. If setpoint group 1 is lit
green, only the protection elements under group 1 will be active. The protection
elements from group 2 will be inactive. The settings for each protection element can
be edited and displayed regardless of the active group.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

• TRIP: Red
This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to
the trip output relay. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the
RESET pushbutton Breaker Control, or communications; in all cases after the fault
condition has cleared.

LED: TRIP

TRIP (from any el;ement set tp TRIP)

RESET (comand)

OR
AND
898866A1.CDR

• ALARM: Orange
This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition, with element functions
selected as “alarm”. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears.
The LED will remain steady “ON”, if the function of the operated protection was
selected as "latched alarm".
• PICKUP: Orange
This indicator will light ON upon pickup condition generated by any of the relay
features. The indicator will turn off if no pickup condition is detected.
• MAINTENANCE: Orange
This LED may indicate both breaker or relay maintenance depending on the
programmed maintenance elements. The LED will turn on upon operation of a
maintenance element.
• W1 BREAKER OPEN: Red/Green/Orange/Off – programmable color, default Green
This LED is lit when the winding 1 breaker is detected open.
• W1 BREAKER CLOSED: Red/Green/Orange/Off – programmable color, default
Green
This LED is lit when the winding 1 breaker is detected closed.
• W2 BREAKER OPEN: Red/Green/Orange/Off – programmable color, default Green
This LED is lit when the winding 2 breaker is detected open.
• W2 BREAKER CLOSED: Red/Green/Orange/Off – programmable color, default
Green
This LED is lit when the winding 2 breaker is detected closed.
Refer to M7 Testing for information on testing LED status indicators.
NOTE:

NOTE

3–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE

LED status indicators - Front panel with programmable LEDs

• IN SERVICE: Green
This LED will be continuously “ON”, when the relay is set to “Ready” under S1 RELAY
SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS, and no major self-test errors have been
detected.
• TROUBLE: Orange
This LED will turn “ON”, when the relay is not programmed (Not Ready) state under S1
RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS, or upon detection of a major self-test
error. The relay will turn back to “IN-SERVICE” if no major self-test error is present.
• TRIP: Red
This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to
the trip output relay. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the
RESET pushbutton Breaker Control, or communications; in all cases after the fault
condition has cleared.

LED: TRIP

TRIP (from any el;ement set tp TRIP)

RESET (comand)

OR
AND

898866A1.CDR

• ALARM: Orange
This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition, with element functions
selected as “alarm”. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears.
The LED will remain steady “ON”, if the function of the operated protection was
selected as "latched alarm".
• LED 1: Red - programmable source signal and type
• LED 2: Orange - programmable source signal and type
• LED 3: Orange - programmable source signal and type
• LED 4: Orange - programmable source signal and type
• LED 5: Red/Orange/Green/Off - programmable source signal, type, and color
• LED 6: Red/Orange/Green/Off - programmable source signal, type, and color
• LED 7: Red/Orange/Green/Off - programmable source signal, type, and color
• LED 8: Red/Orange/Green/Off - programmable source signal, type, and color
Refer to M7 Testing for information on testing LED status indicators.
NOTE:

NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Relay messages

Target messages Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, or alarms.
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds will start rolling up the
other target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET command is initiated.
The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE
DOWN key. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the other faceplate
pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show the target messages unless the user
navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES, where they can be reviewed. If the
target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a pushbutton different
from “RESET”, they will reappear on the screen after the time specified under the
SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting, that will start
timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. The following shows the format of a typical
Target Message:
Figure 3-5: Typical target message

A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Cause <function>
State: Operate
▼ Phase:
Example of a Phase IOC1 operation - phase A:
Phase IOC1 function: Trip

A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
State: Operate
▼ Phase:A
Cause <Function>
The first line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated
element), and the element function.
State: Operate
This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup, Operated, Alarm.
Phase: A
The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated.

3–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE

Self-test errors The relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a
background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly.
There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. Minor
problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the
power system. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
CAUTION:

Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay will:

• Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED at the same time as the "IN SERVICE" LED is on.
• Display the error on the relay display.
• Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder.
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
• De-energize critical failure relay (Output Relay 7).
• Inhibit operation of all other output relays (1 to 6).
• Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED; turn on the "TROUBLE" LED.
• Flash the "ALARM" LED.
• Display the cause of major self-test failure.
• Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Figure 3-6: Typical Self-test warning

A4 TARGET MESSAGES
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact Factory:
Error code:1

Table 3-1: Minor Self-test Errors

Self-test Error Latched Description of How Often the Test What to do
Message Target Problem is Performed
Message?
MAINTENANCE No A bad IRIG-B input Every 5 seconds* Ensure IRIG-B cable is
ALERT: IRIG-B signal has been connected, check cable
Failure detected. functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform
continuity test), ensure
IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check
input signal level (it may
be less than specification).
If none of these apply,
contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE No Clock time is the Every 5 seconds* Set the date and time in
ALERT: Clock same as the default S1 RELAY SETUP.
Not Set time.
MAINTENANCE No Communication Every 5 seconds* If alert doesn’t self-reset,
ALERT: Comm error between CPU then contact factory.
Alert 1, 2, or 3 and Comms board. Otherwise monitor
recurrences as errors are
detected and self-reset.
MAINTENANCE No Communication Detected Check Ethernet cable and
ALERT : error between Instantaneously Ethernet connection.
Ethernet Link 345 and Network. Check health of the
Fail network. Check status of
external routers and
switches. Check that IP
settings are not 0.0.0.0

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Self-test Error Latched Description of How Often the Test What to do

Message Target Problem is Performed
Message?
MAINTENANCE No Every 5 seconds*
ALERT: High
Ethernet
Traffic
MAINTENANCE No The ambient Every 1 hour Increase ventilation to the
ALERT: High temperature is surroundings.
Ambient above 80oC.
Temperature
MAINTENANCE No The rear Every 5 seconds* Replace the rear
ALERT: Communications communications
Daughter Error daughter board type daughter board with the
does not match the correct board.
order code.
MAINTENANCE No The internal Every 5 seconds* Contact factory.
ALERT: Comms communications
Serial Invalid board does not
match the order
code.
MAINTENANCE No RMIO Module is not Every 5 seconds* Validate the RMIO Module;
ALERT: RMIO validated; check CANBUS
Mismatch communications communication.
with the RMIO
module are lost or
interrupted.

* Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures - that is after 25 seconds
Table 3-2: Major Self-test Errors
Self-test Error Latched Description of How Often the Test What to do
Message Target Problem is Performed
Message?
UNIT FAILURE: Yes This warning is Every 5 seconds* Contact the factory and
Contact caused by a unit provide the failure code.
Factory (XXXX) hardware failure.
Failure code (XXXX) is
shown.
RELAY NOT No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and Program all required
READY: Check INSTALLATION whenever the settings then set the
Settings setting indicates that PRODUCT SETUP PRODUCT SETUP
relay is not in a INSTALLATION INSTALLATION setting to
programmed state. setting is altered. "Programmed".

* Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures - that is after 25 seconds

3–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE

Flash messages Flash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response
to pressing certain keys. The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds.
Figure 3-7: Typical Flash message

SETPOINT STORED
This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint
message (see example above). The edited value was stored as entered.
COMMAND EXECUTED
This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON, OFF, YES, NO,
etc.
INVALID PASSWORD
This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password, as part of
password security.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Software setup

Quick setup - Software interface

• The Quick Setup window allows you to configure important settings from different
screens in the relay by adding them to a common window.
• Quick Setup window options are available for a single device or a file.
• The Quick Setup Window option is accessed from the "Tree" which launches on
clicking.

EnerVista 3 Series Setup Software

Although settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys, a PC can be used
to download setpoints through the communications port. The EnerVista 3 Series
Setup software is available from GE Multilin to make this as convenient as possible. With
EnerVista 3 Series Setup running, it is possible to:
• Program and modify settings
• Load and save setting files to and from a disk
• Read actual values
• Monitor status
• Read pre-trip data and event records
• Get help on any topic

3–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

• Upgrade the 345 firmware

The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software allows immediate access to all 345 features with
easy to use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. This section provides
the necessary information to install EnerVista 3 Series Setup , upgrade the relay firmware,
and write and edit setting files.
The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software can run without a 345 connected to the computer. In
this case, settings may be saved to a file for future use. If a 345 is connected to a PC and
communications are enabled, the 345 can be programmed from the setting screens. In
addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual
value screens.

Hardware and The following requirements must be met for the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software.
software • Pentium 4 (Core Duo recommended)
requirements • Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended) , Windows 7 (32-bit or
64-bit), Windows 8.1 (32-bit or 64-bit), Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit)
• 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended)
• 500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended)
• 1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended)
The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or
the GE Multilin website at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin

Installing the After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to
EnerVista 3 Series install the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
Setup software 1. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-
charge EnerVista software on the local PC.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.

5. In the EnerVista Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the
345 Feeder Protection System as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the
most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then
click the Add Now button to list software items for the 345 .

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

6. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD
and automatically start the installation process. A status window with a progress bar
will be shown during the downloading process.

7. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista
3 Series Setup software will be installed.
8. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory
indicated, the USB driver will be loaded into the computer, and the installation
program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista 3 Series Setup software to
the Windows start menu.
9. The 345 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad
window, as shown below.

3–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

If you are going to communicate from your computer to the 345 Relay using the USB
port:
10. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the 345 Relay then into the USB port on your
computer.
11. Launch EnerVista 3 Series Setup from LaunchPad.
12. In EnerVista > Device Setup:

13. Select USB as the Interface type.

14. Select 345 Relay as the USB device.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Upgrading the The latest EnerVista software and firmware can be downloaded from:
software https://www.gegridsolutions.com/
After upgrading, check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does
not display, try uninstalling the software and reinstalling the new versions.

Connecting EnerVista 3 Series Setup to the relay

Configuring serial Before starting, verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the
communications front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back
of the device (for RS485 communications). This example demonstrates an USB connection.
For RS485 communications, the GE Multilin F485 converter will be required. Refer to the
F485 manual for additional details. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications,
see Configuring Ethernet Communications below.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software (available
from the GE Multilin web site). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site
name.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista 3 Series Setup window.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the
device.
7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list.

3–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 device and upload the order
code.
9. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista 3 Series Setup window.
The 345 Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. Proceed to
Connecting to the Relay below, to begin communications.

Using the Quick The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front
Connect feature panel USB port of a 345 relay, or through the Ethernet port. The following window will
appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed:

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

As indicated by the window, the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the EnerVista
3 Series Setup software to a 345 front port if the USB is selected in the interface drop-down
list. Select "SR3 Relay" and press the Connect button. Ethernet can also be used as the
interface for Quick Connect as shown above.
When connected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window.

The 345 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for either USB
or Ethernet communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below, to begin
communications.

3–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

Configuring Ethernet Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ-45 Ethernet
communications port.

345 supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.

NOTE:

NOTE 1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 3 Series Setup Setup software
(available from the GE EnerVista CD). See the previous section for the installation
procedure.
2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site
name.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field, and a description (optional).
7. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of
interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

8. Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the 345 relay
(from the S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET menu).
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 and upload the order code. If
a communications error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values
correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista 3 Series Setup window.
The 345 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to
the following section to begin communications.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Connecting to the Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can
relay easily communicate with the relay.
1. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to
list the available devices for the given site.
2. Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of
headers is shown for each device:
Device Definition
Actual Values
Quick Setup
Setpoints
Maintenance.
3. Expand the SETTINGS > RELAY SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open
the Front Panel settings window as shown:

4. The Front Panel settings window opens with a corresponding status indicator on the
lower left of the EnerVista 3 Series Setup window.
5. If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly
connected to the relay, and that the relay has been properly configured for
communications (steps described earlier).
The Front Panel settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and
command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values"
windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at
will.

3–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

Working with setpoints and setpoint files

Engaging a device The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to
directly communicate with a relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by
communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected
from the product series.

Entering setpoints The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints.
Inthis example, we will be changing the power system setpoints.
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer menu item.
3. Select the Transformer Rating setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box.
This will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value, and another to
launch the numerical keypad.
4. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that
allows the user to enter a value within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the
keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from
the keypad and retain the old value.

5. For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Transformer type below),
clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a dropdown selection menu
arrow. Select the desired value from this list.

6. For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "relay name"), the value may
be entered directly within the setpoint value box.
7. In the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer dialog box, click on Save to save the
values into the 345 . Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click
Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Setting Front panels with programmable LEDs have eight LEDs that are off by default, and must
programmable LEDs be set to a source signal and type. Four of these LEDs can also be set to different colors.
1. Establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Setpoint > S1 Relay Setup > Front Panel menu item.
3. Select an LED Source setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box beside an
LED Source label. This opens a Quick Navigation window.

4. Select a Type for the LED (Latched or Self-Reset), and a Color if applicable.
5. Repeat this process for all programmable LED Source, Type, and Color parameters.

6. In the Setpoint > S1 Relay Setup > Front Panel dialog box, click Save to save the
values into the 345 . Click YES to accept any changes. Click Restore to retain previous
values. Click Default to restore Default values (all LEDs Off and colors Orange).
7. Click View Layout and Print to create a printable label for the front panel showing the
programmable LED settings. Edit LED names manually by clicking the LED label and
entering up to 20 characters. (Manual edits can be printed, but are not saved.)

3–22 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

8. Click Print to print a copy of the customized front panel label.

File support Opening any EnerVista 3 Series Setup file will automatically launch the application or
provide focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘SR3’
extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back
to the Settings List tree.
New files will be automatically added to the tree.

Using setpoint files The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes
to relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later
download to communicating relays.
• Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then
saving the settings when complete.
• Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving
them to the relay when complete.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file
contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:
• Device Definition
• Relay Setup
• System Setup
• Protection
• Control
• Inputs/Outputs
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The EnerVista 3 Series Setup displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front
panel display.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Downloading and Back up a copy of the in-service settings for each commissioned 345 unit, so as to revert
saving setpoint files to the commissioned settings after inadvertent, unauthorized, or temporary setting
changes are made, after the settings default due to firmware upgrade, or when the unit
has to be replaced. This section describes how to backup settings to a file and how to use
that file to restore settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay
Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware
upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highly recommended before making any setpoint
changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista 3 Series Setup window are accessed in the Files Window.
Use the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and
configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista 3 Series Setup to the Relay, above.
2. Select the desired device from the site list.
3. Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item, or right-click on the
device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the
device.
4. After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and
destination path of the setpoint file. The corresponding file extension will be
automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry will be
added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.

Adding setpoint files The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a
to the environment large group of setpoint files. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1. In the files pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as
shown:

2. The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved
setpoint file. As for any other MS Windows® application, browse for the file to be
added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.

3–24 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

Creating a new The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files
setpoint file independent of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The
following procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
1. In the File pane, right click on File and select the New Settings File item. The following
box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct
firmware version. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that
setpoints not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay.

Discontinued order codes may be included to maintain back-compatibility of setpoint files.

NOTE:

For current order codes, refer to the GE Multilin website at http://

NOTE www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin.

2. Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new setpoint file.
3. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate
the identification of the device and the purpose of the file.
4. To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name
box.
5. Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to
replace an existing file. All 345 setpoint files should have the extension ‘SR3’ (for
example, ‘feeder1.SR3’).
6. Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a
complete path, will be added to the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software environment.

Upgrading setpoint It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the
files to a new revision 345 firmware has been upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
1. Establish communications with the 345 relay.
2. Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware
Revision.
3. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista 3 Series Setup environment as
described in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
4. In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

5. From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties
menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file. If this version is different from
the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a New File Version that matches the
Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu.
6. For example, if the firmware revision is L0L01MA140.000 (Firmware Revision 1.40) and
the current setpoint file revision is 1.20, change the setpoint file revision to “1.4x”.

Discontinued order codes may be included to maintain back-compatibility of setpoint files.

NOTE:

For current order codes, refer to the GE Multilin website at http://

NOTE www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin.

7. Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the "Description" field.
8. Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field.
9. When complete, click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. See
Loading Setpoints from a File below, for instructions on loading this setpoint file into
the 345 .

Printing setpoints and The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of
actual values setpoints and actual values. Use the following procedure to print a list of setpoints:
1. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications
with a 345 device.
2. From the main window, select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item.

3–26 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section
and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled
Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering
section and click OK.

4. The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above.
5. Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in
the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or
Print Settings File options.

Printing actual values A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the
from a connected following procedure:
device 1. Establish communications with the desired 345 device.
2. From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper
section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only
Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the
filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired
device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Loading setpoints
from a file
An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a
CAUTION:

revision number that does not match the relay firmware. If the firmware has been
upgraded since saving the setpoint file, see for instructions on changing the revision
number of a setpoint file.

The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a
setpoints file, it must first be added to the EnerVista 3 Series Setup environment as
described in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
1. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista 3 Series
Setup software main window.
2. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the
corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the
target relay. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New
Revision for details on changing the setpoints file version.
3. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an
incompatibility, an error of the following type will occur:

If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data
will be transferred to the relay. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in
the bottom of the main window.

Uninstalling files and The unit can be decommissioned by turning off the power to the unit and disconnecting
clearing data the wires to it. Files can be cleared after uninstalling the EnerVista software or 345 device,
for example to comply with data security regulations. On the computer, settings files can
be identified by the .sr3 extension.
To clear the current settings file do the following:
1. Create a default settings file.
2. Write the default settings file to the relay.
3. Delete all other files with the .sr3 extension.
4. Delete any other data files , which can be in standard formats, such as COMTRADE or
.csv.
You cannot directly erase the flash memory, but all records and settings in that memory
can be deleted. Do this using these commands:
ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS
• EVENTS RECORDS > CLEAR
• TRANSIENT RECORDS > CLEAR

3–28 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

Upgrading relay firmware

To upgrade the 345 firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful
completion of this procedure, the 345 will have new firmware installed with the factory
default setpoints.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at
http://www.GEgridsolutions.com/multilin.
EnerVista 3 Series Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into
NOTE:

a 345 relay.
NOTE

Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current 345 settings to a file on
NOTE:

your PC. After the firmware has been upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back
NOTE into the 345 . Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files for details on saving relay
setpoints to a file.

Loading new relay Loading new firmware into the 345 flash memory is accomplished as follows:
firmware 1. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in
Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files.
2. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item.
3. The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software will request the new firmware file. Locate the
folder that contains the firmware files to load into the 345 . The firmware filename has
the following format:

SR3_0.SFD
Firmware Rev #
4. EnerVista 3 Series Setup software now prepares the 345 to receive the new firmware
file. The 345 front panel will momentarily display "BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for
Message,” indicating that it is in upload mode.
5. While the file is being loaded into the 345 , a status box appears showing how much of
the new firmware file has been transferred and the upgrade status. The entire transfer
process takes approximately 10 minutes.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

6. The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software will notify the user when the 345 has finished
loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the
main screen. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade.
After successfully updating the 345 firmware, the relay will not be in service and will
require setpoint programming. To communicate with the relay, the communication
settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.
When communications is established, the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the
relay. See Loading Setpoints from a File for details.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding
data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change
slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are
enhanced or modified.

3–30 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

Advanced EnerVista 3 Series Setup features

Transient recorder The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace
(Waveform capture) memory) from the relay at the instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.
• With EnerVista 3 Series Setup software running and communications established,
select the Actual Values > A3 Records > Transient Records menu item to open the
Transient Recorder Viewer window.

• Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture. Waveform file numbering

starts with the number zero in the 345 , so that the maximum trigger number will
always be one less than the total number of triggers available.
• Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new
window will appear, requesting the file name and path. One file is saved as a
COMTRADE file, with the extension "CFG." The other file is a "DAT" file, required by the
COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
• To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the
corresponding COMTRADE file.
• To view the captured waveforms, click on the Launch Viewer button. A detailed
Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

TRIGGER TIME & DATE VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT CURSOR LINE POSITION DELTA
Displays the time and date Click here to open a new graph Indicates the cursor line position Indicates time difference
of the Trigger. to display vectors. in time with respect to the between the two cursor
beginning of the buffer. lines.

FILE NAME CURSOR LINES TRIGGER LINE

Display graph values Indicates the To move lines, locate the mouse Indicates the point
at the corresponding file name and pointer over the cursor line, then in time for the
cursor line. Cursor complete path click and drag the cursor to the trigger.
lines are identified (if saved). new position.
by their colors.
• The red vertical line indicates the trigger point.
• The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. To
match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it, make note of the time
and date shown in the graph, then find the event that matches the same time in the
event recorder. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and
system conditions at the time of the event.
• From the window main menu bar, press the Preference button to open the COMTRADE
Setup page, in order to change the graph attributes.

3–32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

Preference Button
The following window will appear:

Change the color of each graph as desired, and select other options as required, by
checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store these graph attributes, and to close the
window. The Waveform Capture window will reappear based on the selected graph
attributes.
To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture, press the
Vector Display button to display the following window:

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Protection summary Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of
different settings from Grouped Elements, Control Elements and Maintenance screens.
Protection Summary Screen allows the user to:
• view the output relay assignments for the elements
• modify the output relay assignments for the elements
• view the enable/disable status of Control Elements
• navigate to the respected Protection Element screen on a button click.
An example of the Protection Summary screen follows:

3–34 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Password security Password security is an optional feature of the 345 which can be setup using the EnerVista
3 Series Setup software. The password system has been designed to facilitate a hierarchy
for centralized management. This is accomplished through a Master level access
password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher level
privileged operations. In cases where operational security is required as well as a central
administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged. The
feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the
EnerVista 3 Series Setup software. This section describes how to perform the initial setup.
For more details on the password security feature, refer to Chapter 6 - Password Security.
1. 345 devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. If the
password security feature is to be used, the user must first change the Master
Password from the initial Null setting, this can only be done over communications, not
from the front panel keypad. The new Master Password must be 8 to 10 characters in
length, and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers. The letters are case
sensitive. Set Change Master Password to Yes to enable password security. After
entering a valid Master Password, enter the new Master Password again to confirm,
then select Change Password.
To disable password security, Set Change Master Password to Yes and then click Disable
NOTE:

Password.
NOTE

2. Now that the Master Password has been programmed, enter it again to log in to the
Master Access level. The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local
Passwords. If the Master Password has been lost, contact the factory.

3. With Master Level access, the user may disable password security altogether, or
change the Master Password.
4. The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Setpoint and Remote
Control passwords. These passwords are initially set to a Null value, and can only be
set or changed from a remote user over RS485 or Ethernet communications. Remote
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.

3–36 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP

5. Initial setup of the Local Setpoint and Local Control passwords requires the Master
Access level. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES, Local passwords can be
changed remotely only (over RS485 or Ethernet). If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to
NO, Local passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). If changing
Local Passwords is permitted locally, the keypad user can only change the Local
Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. Local
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.

6. If any Remote password has never been set, that level will not be attainable except
when logged in as the Master Level. The same logic applies to the Local passwords.
7. When passwords have been set, the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate
password depending on the interface being used (remote or local), and the nature of
the change being made (setpoint or control). If the correct password is entered, the
user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. The access level
turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity, if control power is cycled, or if the
user enters an incorrect password.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

3–38 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 4: Actual values

Actual values

Actual values overview

All measured values, the status of digital inputs and outputs, and fault analysis information
are accessed in Actual Values mode. Actual value messages are organized into logical
groups for easy reference as shown below.
Figure 4-1: Main Actual Values menu

ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS A1 STATUS
A2 METERING A2 METERING CLOCK
A3 RECORDS WINDING 1 CURRENTS CONTACT INPUTS
ٕ WINDING 2 CURRENTS OUTPUT RELAYS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES XFMR DIFF CURRENTS ٕ
897760A2.cdr ٕ LOGIC ELEMENTS
XFMR THERM CAP VIRTUAL INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
A3 RECORDS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
EVENT RECORDS
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
TRANSIENT RECORDS
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
FAULT REPORTS
GOOSE STATUS
ٕ
GOOSE HDR. STATUS
CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR TRANST REC
CLEAR THERM CAP
CLEAR FAULT REPORT

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A1 Status

Clock
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK
CURRENT DATE
Feb 23 2016
Range: Date in format shown
Indicates today’s date.
CURRENT TIME
09:17:12
Range: Time in format shown
Indicates the current time of day.

Contact inputs
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
52a W1 BRK (CI #1) (Contact Input 1)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52a
breaker auxiliary contact.
52b W1 BRK (CI#2) (Contact Input 2)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52b
breaker auxiliary contact.
52a W2 BRK (CI#3) (Contact Input 3)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52a
breaker auxiliary contact.
52b W2 BRK (CI#4) (Contact Input 4)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52b
breaker auxiliary contact.
CONTACT INPUT 5 to 10
OFF
Range: Off, On
Message displays the state of the contact input. The message “ON” indicates that the
contact input is energized, and message “OFF” indicates a de-energized contact.

Output relays
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS

4–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS

RELAY 1 TRIP (Output Relay #1)

OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #1 (W1 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent
to the W1 breaker.
RELAY 2 TRIP (Output Relay #2)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #2 (W2 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent
to the W2 breaker.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 (Auxiliary Output Relays)
OFF
Range: Off, On
OUTPUT RELAY 7 (Critical Failure Relay)
Range: Off, On
The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in-service.

Logic elements
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1 to 16
OFF
Range: Off, On
The state “ON” or “OFF” for each logic element depends on its programmed logic:
triggering inputs, blocking inputs, plus any pickup, and/or reset time delay.

Virtual inputs
The state of all active virtual inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On

Remote inputs
The state of all active remote inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On

Remote outputs
The state of all active remote outputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Contact inputs summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > C. INPUTS SUMMARY
C. INPUTS SUMMARY

52a OFF CI#5 OFF

52b OFF CI#6 OFF
52a OFF CI#7 OFF
52b OFF CI#8 OFF
CI#9 OFF CI#10 OFF

The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs.

Output relays summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
OUTPUT RELAYS SUMMARY

R1 TRIP OFF RLY#5 OFF

R2 TRIP OFF RLY#6 OFF
RLY#3 OFF RLY#7 ON
RLY#4 OFF

This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.

Output relay #7 is the Critical Failure relay, used to indicate the correct functioning of the
NOTE:

345 relay. This output relay shows the status "ON" when the 345 relay is powered up and
NOTE set to "Ready" and no self-test alarms are active, under SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1
INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS.

Logic elements summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY

LE#1 OFF LE#9 OFF

LE#2 OFF LE#10 OFF
LE#3 OFF LE#11 OFF
LE#4 OFF LE#12 OFF
LE#5 OFF LE#13 OFF
LE#6 OFF LE#14 OFF
LE#7 OFF LE#15 OFF
LE#8 OFF LE#16 OFF

This display shows a summary of the states of all logic elements.

4–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS

GOOSE status
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE STATUS
GOOSE 1 TO 8 STATUS
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF

GOOSE HDR status

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE HDR STATUS
GOOSE 1 TO 8 H.STATUS
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF

61850 status
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > 61850 STATUS
When a CID file is sent to the relay following a configuration change, it is temporarily
placed in the SCL/notvalidated directory. Once the CID file is validated locally, it is
transferred to the SCL/validated directory. The status of the validation process is indicated
by the following 61850 status values.
61850 STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready, Default CID
Not Ready: there is an error in the CID file, with no 61850 services operative. A corrected
CID file must be sent to the relay using the IEC 61850 Configurator.
Ready: there is a validated CID file in the SCL/validated directory, with all 61850 services
operative.
Default CID: no CID file was found in either SCL/notvalidated or SCL/validated, so a
default CID files was loaded. After the next reboot the default CID file will be treated as a
regular CID file.
61850 NV STATUS
Range: Unknown, Header Error, Parse Error, Passed to Validated, Empty
Unknown: a default CID files has been created.
Header Error: the CID file in the SCL/notvalidated directory does not match the version
of order code of the relay.
Parse Error: that the CID file in the SCL/notvalidated directory could not be validated.
Passed to Validated: a CID file was successfully validated and moved to the SCL/
validated directory.
Empty: there is no CID file in the SCL/notvalidated directory.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A2 Metering
The relay measures fundamental frequency phase and ground currents, and all auxiliary
analog inputs. Other values like neutral current, symmetrical components, differential and
restraint currents are derived. All quantities are recalculated every power system cycle
and perform protection and monitoring functions. Displayed metered quantities are
updated approximately three (3) times a second for readability. All phasors and
symmetrical components are referenced to the phase A current phasor.
By scrolling the Up/Down keys the relay shows one-by-one, all metered values as follows:

Winding 1 Current
Path: ACTUAL VALUES > A2 METERING > WINDING 1 CURRENT
W1 PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 SENS GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 600 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 GND DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

Winding 2 Current
Path: ACTUAL VALUES > A2 METERING > WINDING 2 CURRENT
W2 PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W2 PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag

4–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING

W2 PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W2 NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W2 GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W2 SENS GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 600 A, 0 to 359o lag
W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W2 GND DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

Transformer Differential and Restraint Currents

Path: ACTUAL VALUES > A2 METERING > XFMR DIFF CURRENTS
PH A DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

PH A RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

DIFF 2 HARM PH A
0.0 % f0

DIFF 5 HARM PH A
0.0 % f0

PH B DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

PH B RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

DIFF 2 HARM PH B
0.0 % f0

DIFF 5 HARM PH B
0.0 % f0

PH C DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

PH C RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

DIFF 2 HARM PH C
0.0 % f0

DIFF 5 HARM PH C
0.0 % f0

Transformer Thermal Capacity

Path: ACTUAL VALUES > A2 METERING > XFMR THERMAL CAP
THERM CAP PH A
0.0%
Range: 1 to 150%
THERM CAP PH B
0.0%
Range: 1 to 150%
THERM CAP PH C
0.0%
Range: 1 to 150%

Current Demand 1(2)

The relay measures Current Demand on each phase. These parameters can be monitored
to reduce supplier Demand penalties or for statistical metering purposes. Demand
calculations are based on the measurement type selected under S6 MONITORING >
DEMAND. For each quantity, the relay displays the Demand over the most recent Demand
time interval, the maximum Demand since the last maximum Demand reset, and the time
and date stamp of this maximum Demand value. Maximum Demand quantities can be
reset to zero with the A3 RECORDS > CLEAR RECORDS command.
Path: A2 METERING > CURRENT DEMAND 1
Path: A2 METERING > CURRENT DEMAND 2
LAST RESET
MM/DD/YY 00:00:00
CUR DEMAND 1 PH A
Range: 0.0 to 30000.0 A
MAX CUR DEMAND 1 PH A
Range: 0.0 to 30000.0 A
CUR DEMAND 1 PH B
Range: 0.0 to 30000.0 A
MAX CUR DEMAND 1 PH B
Range: 0.0 to 30000.0 A
CUR DEMAND 1 PH C
Range: 0.0 to 30000.0 A
MAX CUR DEMAND 1 PH C
Range: 0.0 to 30000.0 A

4–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING

CUR DEMAND 1 PH A D/T

MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
CUR DEMAND 1 PH B D/T
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
CUR DEMAND 1 PH C D/T
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

Clear current demand 1 (2)

Path: ACTUAL VALUES > A2 METERING > CLEAR CURR DEMAND 1 (2)
CLEAR CURR DEMAND 1 (2)
NO
Range: No, Yes
When set to "YES," pressing the ENTER key will clear all current demand 1 or current
demand 2 data.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 Records
The 345 has an event recorder which runs continuously. All event records are stored in
memory such that information is maintained for up to 3 days even after losing relay
control power. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. Each event has a
header message containing a summary of the event that occurred, and is assigned an
event number equal to the number of events that have occurred since the recorder was
cleared. The event number is incremented for each new event.

Event records
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in non-volatile memory where the information is maintained, even in the case
where relay control power is lost.
Shown below is an example of an event record caused by a Breaker Open operation, and
the recorded information at the time of this record.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS
Table 4-1: Example of Event Record
A3 EVENT REC T:5655 E5655 Jan 05, 10 ▶ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ia x
Ph IOC1 Trip OP 17:32:28.376 CT(W1)0.08 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ib x
CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ic x
CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ig x
CTg(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 In x
CT(W1)0.08 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igd x
CT(W1)0.08 x CT
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igr x
CT(W1)0.08 x CT
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW1 I_2 x
CT(W1)0.03 x CT
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ia x
CT(W2)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ib x
CT(W2)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ic x
CT(W2)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼

4–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ig x

CTg(W2)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW2 In x
CT(W2)0.00 x CT 0° Lag
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igd x
CT(W2)0.00 x CT
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igr x
CT(W2)0.00 x CT
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 I_2 x
CT(W1)0.00 x CT
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Diff, x
CT(W1)0.08
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph BDiff, x
CT(W1)0.00
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Diff, x
CT(W1)0.00
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Rest, x
CT(W1)0.00
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph B Rest, x
CT(W1)0.00
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Rest, x
CT(W1)0.00
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm
Ph A Diff6.2% fo
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm
Ph B Diff0.0% fo
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm
Ph C Diff0.0% fo
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap
Ph A1.1% fo
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap
Ph B0.0%
▼
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap
Ph C0.0%

Each event is saved with event number, date and time, and contains information such as
per-phase current, ground current or sensitive ground current, neutral current, negative
sequence current, ground differential current, per-phase differential and restraint currents.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Second and fifth harmonic per-phase differential current. All per Winding 1 and 2. The
Event Recorder can be cleared from ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC
setpoint. The following table provides a list of the event types:
Table 4-2: Event type
Event Type Display Description
General Events None Events that occur when specific
operation takes place
Pickup Events PICKUP: These are events that occur when a
protection element picks up
Trip Events TRIP: These are events that occur when a
breaker trip is initiated
Alarm and Latched Alarm Events ALARM: These are events that occur when an
alarm is initiated
Control Events CONTROL: These are events that occur when a
control element is activated
Dropout Events DROPOUT: These are events that occur when a
protection element drops out after a
corresponding pickup event
Contact Input Events C. INPUT: These are events that occur when a
contact input changes its state
Virtual Input Events V. INPUT These are events that occur when a
virtual input changes its state
Remote Input Events R. INPUT These are events that occur when a
remote input changes its state
Logic Element Events L. ELEMENT These are events that occur when a logic
element changes its state
Self-Test Warning Events SELF-TEST WARNING These are events that occur when a self-
test warning is detected.
Block Events BLOCK: These are events that occur upon
activation of any block signal.
Setting Date/Time Events GENERAL: These are events that occur upon
changing the date or time in the relay.

For a complete list of Event Causes, see Format Code FC134 in the 3 Series
Communications Guide. Note that the format codes differ for each relay model.

Transient records
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > TRANSIENT RECORDS
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes
TOTAL RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
AVAILABLE RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
LAST CLEARED
Feb 08 2009
Range: N/A

4–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS

Fault report
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > FAULT REPORT
PH IOC1 TRIP OP
PHASE: A C
04/01/2016 16:30:23.324

MODEL: 345-EP5G5HEMNN2EDN
NAME: XFMR 5
F/W REVISION: 2.20

W1 PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W1 PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W1 PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W1 NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W1 GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W2 PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W2 PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W2 PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W2 NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

W2 GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag

PH A DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

PH A RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

PH B DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

PH B RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

PH C DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

PH C RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag

FREQUENCY
60.00 Hz

Learned data
Clearing learned data (ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR LEARNED DATA) resets all
these values to their default settings.
RTD 1 to 12 MAX TEMPERATURE
Range: -50 to 250°C
The maximum temperature experienced by each of the RTDs.
Once a second each of the RTD temperature values is captured. For each RTD, if the
captured RTD temperature value is greater than the RDT maximum temperature already
stored, the RDT maximum temperature is set to this latest captured RTD temperature
value. The RTD maximum temperature values are maintained in non-volatile memory to
carry over a relay power interruption.

Clear learned data

CLEAR LEARNED DATA
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all learned data.

Clear event record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all event records.

Clear transient record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR TRANST REC

4–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS

CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all transient records.

Clear thermal capacity record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR THERM CAP
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all thermal capacity records.

Clear fault report

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR FAULT REPORT
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all fault reports.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A4 Target messages
Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, alarms, or asserted input. The target messages shown in the table below are
displayed as necessary.
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds starts rolling up the
other target messages, until the Reset command is initiated. If the Reset command is not
performed, but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not
show the target messages, unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET
MESSAGES, where they can be reviewed.
The target messages can be reviewed by pressing Up and Down message pushbuttons
from the relay keypad.
For a complete list of Active Targets, see Format Code FC134A in the 3 Series
Communications Guide. Note that the format codes differ for each relay model.
• The PKP messages will appear on the relay display as long as their respective flags are
active. The messages will disappear from the display, when either the protection
element drops out before operation, such as when the condition clears before
reaching operation, or when the protection element operates.
• The OP and BKR Status messages will appear on the relay display, when the
respective element operates, with the element function set to “TRIP”, or “LATCHED
ALARM”. The message will stay on the display after the condition clears, and will
disappear upon Reset command. If the element function is selected to “ALARM”, or
“CONTROL”, the message will disappear from the display, when the condition causing
operation clears.
• The Breaker Open and Breaker Close messages will appear on the display and stay for
5 seconds only, unless the reset command is initiated, or the element changes its
state. For example, if the breaker is detected “Open”, the message “Breaker Open OK”
will appear on the display and will stay for 5 seconds, unless the breaker status
changes to “Close”. If the breaker status changes to "Close" within 5 seconds after the
breaker has been detected open, the message “Breaker Open OK” will disappear, and
the message “Breaker Close OK” will appear and stay for 5 seconds.
• The Contact Input ON/OFF, Virtual Input ON/OFF, and Remote Input ON/OFF messages
will not appear as target messages upon change of state. The state change, however,
will be logged in the Event recorder.
Examples of how the messages appear on the display:
Example 1:
Phase IOC1 Settings:
• PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Trip
• PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
• PH IOC1 DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 3345 50 display shows the
following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
STATE: OP
Example 2:

4–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES

Phase IOC1 Settings:

• PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Latched Alarm
• PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
• PH IOC1 DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 345 display shows the
following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: OP
Example 3:
Phase IOC1 Settings:
• PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Alarm
• PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
• PH IOC1 DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 345 display shows the
following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: OP
Once the condition clears, the target message will disappear.
NOTE:

NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

4–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 5: Quick setup - Front control

panel

Quick setup - Front control panel

The “Quick Setup” utility is part of the 345 relay main menu, and can be used for quick and
easy programming. Power system parameters, and settings for some simple over-current
elements can be easily set.
Ensure the relay is in "Relay Ready" state before using Quick Setup.
NOTE:

NOTE Figure 5-1: Quick Setup menu

ACTUAL VALUES
COMMANDS QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP RELAY STATUS
SETPOINTS
ٕ
MAINTENANCE
NOMINAL FREQUENCY

W1 PH CT PRIMARY

W1 PH CT SECONDARY

W1 GND CT PRIMARY

W1 GND CT SECONDARY

W2 PH CT PRIMARY

W2 PH CT SECONDARY

W2 GND CT PRIMARY

W2 GND CT SECONDARY

TRANSFORMER TYPE

XFMR RATED LOAD

W1 NOM VOLTAGE

W1 GROUNDING

W2 NOM VOLTAGE

W2 GROUNDING

XFMR PERCENT DIFF

PH TOC1 FUNCTION

GND TOC1 FUNCTION

PH IOC1 FUNCTION
897759A3.cdr GND IOC1 FUNCTION

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QUICK SETUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL

Quick Setup settings

The setpoints below can be programmed under the "Quick Setup" menu.
Note that monitoring of Breaker Status via 52a, 52b, or both of these contacts,, should be
programmed under SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER.
PATH: QUICK SETUP >
RELAY STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready
Default: Not Ready
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
W1 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
W2 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
TRANSFORMER TYPE
Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table
Default: Y/y0
XFMR RATED LOAD
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 MVA in steps of 0.01 MVA
Default: 5.0 MVA
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 kV in steps of 0.01 kV
Default: 13.8 kV
W1 GROUNDING
Range: Not Within Zone, Within Zone
Default: Not Within Zone
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 kV in steps of 0.01 kV
Default: 4.16 kV
W2 GROUNDING
Range: Not Within Zone, Within Zone
Default: Not Within Zone
XFMR PERCENT DIFF
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
↘

5–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP SETTINGS

PCNT DIFF FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
MINIMUM PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.10 x CT
SLOPE 1
Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 30%
BREAKPOINT 1
Range: 0.50 to 4.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.50 x CT
BREAKPOINT 2
Range: 1.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.50 x CT
SLOPE 2
Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 95%
PH TOC1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
↘
PHASE CT INPUT
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
PH TOC1 PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
PH TOC1 CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite
Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/
Short
Default: Ext. Inverse
PH TOC1 TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
↘

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QUICK SETUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL

GND CT INPUT
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
GND TOC1 PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
GND TOC1 CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite
Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/
Short
Default: Ext. Inverse
GND TOC1 TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
↘
PH CT INPUT
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
PH IOC1 PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
GND IOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
↘
GND CT INPUT
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
GND IOC1 PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT

5–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP SETTINGS

RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR

Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
The settings changed using the Quick Setup menu, are available for review and
NOTE:

modification by navigating through S1 RELAY SETUP, S2 SYSTEM SETUP and S3

NOTE PROTECTION in the SETPOINTS main menu.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QUICK SETUP SETTINGS CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL

5–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 6: Setpoints

Setpoints

Setpoints Main Menu

The 345 has a considerable number of programmable setpoints, all of which make the
relay extremely flexible. These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of pages and
subpages as shown below. Each setpoints menu has a section that describes in detail the
setpoints found on that menu.
Figure 6-1: Setpoints main menu

SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP S1 RELAY SETUP
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CLOCK
S3 PROTECTION PASSWORD SECURITY S3 PROTECTION
ٕ COMMUNICATIONS SETPOINT GROUP 1
S4 CONTROLS ٕ SETPOINT GROUP 2
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS EVENT RECORDER
S6 MONITORING TRANSIENT RECDR
FAULT REPORT S4 CONTROLS
FRONT PANEL CHANGE SETP GROUP
INSTALLATION VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
ٕ
S2 SYSTEM SETUP W1 BREAKER FAIL
CURRENT SENSING W2 BREAKER FAIL
POWER SYSTEM RESET
TRANSFORMER LOCKOUT
ٕ
WNDG 1 BREAKER
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
WNDG 2 BREAKER
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
897757A2.cdr
REMOTE INPUTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Setpoint entry methods

Before placing the relay into “IN SERVICE” mode, setpoints defining system characteristics,
inputs, relay outputs, and protection settings must be entered using one of the following
methods:
• Front panel, using the keypad and the display.
• Front USB port, or rear RS485, Ethernet 100 FX, Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (optional) port,
and a computer running the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software supplied with the relay.
• Rear serial RS485, and a SCADA system running user-written software.
Any of these methods can be used to enter the same information. A computer, however,
makes entry much easier. Files can be stored and downloaded for fast, error free entry
when a computer is used. To facilitate this process, the GE EnerVista CD with the EnerVista
3 Series Setup software is supplied with the relay.
The relay leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values, and these
values are shown throughout the setpoint message illustrations. Some of these factory
default values can be left unchanged whenever they satisfy the application.
At a minimum, the S2 SYSTEM SETUP setpoints must be entered for the system to function
correctly. To safeguard against the installation of a relay into which setpoints have not
been entered, the Relay Not Ready self-test warning is displayed. In addition, the critical
failure relay will be de-energized. Once the relay has been programmed for the intended
application, the S1 RELAY SETUP/ INSTALLATION/ RELAY STATUS setpoint should be changed
from “Not Ready” (the default) to “Ready”.

Common setpoints
To make the application of this device as simple as possible, similar methods of operation
and similar types of setpoints are incorporated in various features. Rather than repeat
operation descriptions for this class of setpoint throughout the manual, a general
description is presented in this overview. Details that are specific to a particular feature are
included in the discussion of the feature. The form and nature of these setpoints is
described below.
• FUNCTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the
operational characteristic of each feature. The range for these setpoints is two or
more of: “Disabled”, “Enabled”, “Trip”, “Alarm”, “Latched Alarm”, and “Control”.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Disabled”, the feature is not operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Enabled”, the feature is operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Trip”, then the feature is operational. When an
output is generated, the feature declares a Trip condition, and operates the Trip relay
(output relay 1), any other selected auxiliary output relays, and displays the
appropriate trip message. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Alarm”, the feature is operational. When an output is
generated, the feature declares an Alarm condition which operates any selected
auxiliary output relays and displays the appropriate alarm message. The ALARM LED
will flash upon operation. The Alarm condition will self-reset when the operating
condition clears, turning off the Alarm LED.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Latched Alarm”, the feature is operational. When an
output is generated, the feature declares an Alarm condition which operates any
selected auxiliary output relays and displays the appropriate alarm message. The
ALARM LED will flash upon operation. The Alarm condition and Alarm LED will stay
“ON” after the operating condition clears, until the reset command is initiated.

6–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS SETPOINTS MAIN MENU

If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Control” the feature is operational. When an output

is generated, the feature operates any selected output relays. The “Trip”, “Alarm”, and
“Control” function setpoint values are also used to select those operations that will be
stored in the Event Recorder.
• OUTPUT RELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> OUTPUT RELAYS setpoint selects the
relays required to operate when the feature generates an output. The range is
“Operate” or “Do Not Operate”, and can be applied to any combination of the auxiliary
output relays. The default setting is “Do Not Operate”.
The available auxiliary relays are output relays 3 to 6.
• PICKUP setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> PICKUP setpoint selects the threshold above
which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.
• BLOCK setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> BLOCK setpoint applies the selected input to
block the function. More than one BLOCK setpoint may be available for a given
element; a single high input always blocks the function.
The range depends on order code, and can include Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input
1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, and Logic Elements 1 to 16. The default setting is Off.
• DELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DELAY setpoint selects a fixed time interval to
delay an input signal from appearing at the output. The time from a contact input
change of state or an AC parameter input level change to a contact closure of the 1
Trip relay, is the time selected as time delay in this setpoint plus approximately up to 2
power frequency periods.

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams provide a complete comprehensive understanding of the operation of
each feature. These sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint, input
parameter, and internal logic is used in the feature to obtain an output. In addition to these
logic diagrams, written descriptions are provided in the setpoints chapter which includes
each feature.
• Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled ‘SETPOINT’. The exact wording of
the displayed setpoint message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint
selections are listed below the name and are incorporated in the logic.
• Compensator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled ‘RUN’ with the
associated pickup/dropout setpoint shown directly above. Element operation of the
detector is controlled by the signal entering the ‘RUN’ inset. The measurement/
comparison can only be performed if a logic ‘1’ is provided at the ‘RUN’ input. The
relationship between setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following
symbols: “<” (less than) " >” (greater than), etc.
• Time Delays: Shown as a block with either pickup, drop-out, or both; times in
milliseconds or seconds. If the delay is adjustable, associated delay setpoint is shown
with block SETPOINT on the top of the delay block.
• LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol, □. The exact wording of
the front panel label identifies the indicator.
• Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND, NOR). The inverter
(logical NOT), is shown as a circle: ○.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Setting text abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the setpoints pages.
• A: amperes
• kA: kiloamperes
• V: volts
• kV: kilovolts
• kW: kilowatts
• kVar: kilovars
• kVA: kilo-volt-amperes
• AUX: auxiliary
• COM, Comms: communications
• CT: current transformer
• GND: ground
• Hz: Hertz
• MAX: maximum
• MIN: minimum
• SEC, s: seconds
• UV: undervoltage
• OV: overvoltage
• VT: voltage transformer
• Ctrl: control
• Hr & hr: hour
• O/L: overload

6–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

S1 Relay setup
Figure 6-2: Relay Setup menu

S1 RELAY SETUP
CLOCK
PASSWORD SECURITY
COMMUNICATIONS
ٕ
EVENT RECORDER
TRANSIENT RECDR
FAULT REPORT
FRONT PANEL
INSTALLATION
898764A4.cdr

Clock
The 345 relay has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping via IRIG-B for
various features such as the event and transient recorders. This time stamping is available
with the IRIG-B signal connected to the relay terminals and set to “Enabled”. When an IRIG-
B device is connected to the relay terminals, the relay detects the DC shift or the Amplitude
Modulated signal automatically. Time stamping on multiple relays can be synchronized to
± 1.0 ms with the use of IRIG-B input. Time stamping is also optionally available using SNTP.
Time synchronization priority uses the IRIG-B and SNTP protocols - via Modbus, IEC60870-
5-103, IEC60870-5-104, or DNP commands - as follows:
IRIG-B has the highest priority, so any other source of synchronization should be rejected if
IRIG-B is the synchronization source and an IRIG-B signal is available.
SNTP has the second highest priority, so if IRIG-B is not the synchronization source but
SNTP is, then any other source of synchronization should be rejected.
Synchronization commands are all eventually translated into a MODBUS function, and as
such are blocked from the MODBUS layer as required.
Any synchronization commands other than Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5-104, or
DNP will be accepted only if IRIG-B, and SNTP are not the synchronization sources. There is
no prioritization amongst synchronization commands. A synchronization command issued
from DNP for example, can be directly followed by another from MODBUS, for example.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY)
Range: Month: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year:
2009 to 2099
Default: Jan 15 2009
This setting sets the date in the specified format.
TIME: (HH:MM:SS)
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59
Default: 03:15:50
This setting sets the time in the specified format.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

DLS ENABLE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED]
DLS START MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time.
DLS END MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
IRIG-B:
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the IRIG-B signal for time stamp synchronization.
1. Set the IRIG-B to “Enabled” if the IRIG-B device is connected to the relay IRIG-B
terminals. The relay will display the message “IRIG-B failure” in the case of either no
IRIG-B signal from the connected IRIG-B device, or when the signal cannot be
decoded.
2. Set the date and time per the specified date and time format.
3. Set the start time of the Daylight Saving (DLS) time, by selecting the Month, the Week
of the month, and the Weekday defining the beginning of the Daylight Saving time.
4. Set the end of the Daylight Saving time, by selecting the Month, the Week of the
month, and the Weekday defining the end of the Daylight Saving time.
The clock has a super-capacitor back-up, so that time, date, and events will be kept for up
to 3 days in cases of loss of relay control power.

6–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

SNTP MODE:
Range: Disabled, Unicast, Anycast, Broadcast
Default: Disabled
When “Disabled” is selected for this setting, SNTP time synchronization is disabled.
SNTP PORT:
Range: 0 to 65535
Default: 0
This setting configures the port that 345 .is using.
SNTP SERVER IP ADR:
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address.
UTC OFFSET:
Range: -24.00 to 24.00
Default: 0.00
If this setting is different to zero, this value will be used to convert from UTC to local time
for SNTP synchronization.
Refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details on SNTP MODE, SNTP PORT, and
NOTE:

SNTP SERVER IP ADR.

NOTE

Password security
Password security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against
unauthorized setpoint changes and control. The relay has programmable passwords for
both Local and Remote access, which can be used to allow setpoint changes and
command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. The remote
user may choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords, or enforce use of
the same passwords locally and remotely. The Local and the Remote passwords can be
set only after password security is enabled by entering a Master Password. The Master
Password is set to “NULL” when the relay is shipped from the factory; setting the Master
Password enables password security.
Each interface (RS485, Ethernet, USB, and front panel keypad) is independent of one
another, meaning that enabling setpoint access on one interface does not enable access
for any of the other interfaces. The password must be explicitly entered via the active
interface in order to change setpoints and execute commands. The Master Password
cannot be set from the keypad, and must instead be accessed from one of the other
interfaces.
The EnerVista 3 Series Setup software includes and interface for programming the relay’s
passwords as well as enabling/disabling setpoint access. For example, when an attempt is
made to modify a setpoint but access is restricted, the program will prompt the user to
enter the password and send it to the relay before the setpoint can be written to the relay.
If a SCADA system is used for relay programming, it is up to the programmer to
incorporate appropriate security for the application.
As well as being logged out of security, which allows the user to read setpoints and actual
values only, three levels of security access are provided: Setpoint Level, Control Level, and
Master Level. The Setpoint and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local
passwords (USB port and keypad), or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 and
Ethernet ports). The user can have either Setpoint or Control Level access active, but not
both simultaneously from the same interface. Setpoint and Control passwords must be 3
to 10 alphanumeric characters in length. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting
of passwords, and includes all Setpoint and Control Level access rights. The Master

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Password must be 8 to 10 characters in length, containing at least 2 letters and 2 numbers.

The Master Level can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local
Passwords without having to enter the Master Level. The Master Password is encrypted,
and is not viewable from the keypad. If the Master Password is lost, the user should
contact the factory.
After password entry, the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity
has elapsed, after which the password must be re-entered. A power loss or entering in the
wrong password logs the user out.
Further definition of the access levels is described as follows:
SETPOINT LEVEL
• Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu
• Changing settings under the SETPOINTS menu except the features requiring control
access listed below
• Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and
breaker maintenance settings, except the features requiring control access listed
below
• Changing the Local or Remote Setpoint Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
CONTROL LEVEL
• Virtual Input commands
• Clearing of event records, transient records, and other data
• Changing the Local or Remote Control Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
MASTER LEVEL
• Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Password
• Disabling password security
• All Setpoint and Control Level access rights
• Enabling the Password for Reset Key feature (when enabled, Trip and Alarm resets
require a password)

For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista Setup software,
refer to Chapter 3.

Access passwords This section allows the user to change the Local Setpoint and Local Control Passwords, and
to enable the Password for Reset Key feature (requires the Master Password).
The local user may change a local password from the keypad if all of the following are true:
• Security is enabled
• A valid local setpoint (or local control) password has initially been set
• The remote user has the Overwrite Local Passwords setpoint set to NO
• The local user knows the current local password.
For more details on the Password Security feature, refer to Chapter 3.

6–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

Figure 6-3: Menu for handling password security using keypad

S1 PASSWORD SECURITY
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD S1 LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
LOC CONTROLS PSWD ENTER OLD PASSWORD
PSWD FOR RESET KEY ٕ
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD

S1 LOC CONTROLS PSWD

ENTER OLD PASSWORD
ٕ
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
898772A2.cdr CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD

The following steps describe how to change the Local Setpoints Password from the
keypad. Similar steps are followed to change the Local Control Password.
ENTER OLD PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter the current Local Setpoints Password. User the value up/
down keys to select characters, and use the message left/right keys to move the cursor.
Press the Enter key when done. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if a wrong
password is entered, security is disabled, the password has not been originally set, or the
local user does not have the rights to change the password. In addition, the user will be
automatically logged out of security from the keypad. If the correct password was
entered, the user is now logged in to the Setpoints Level from the keypad, and will be
prompted to enter a new password.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter a new Local Setpoints Password. A valid password is
alphanumeric, and is 3 to 10 characters in length. An INVALID PASSWORD message will
appear if the new password does not meet the password requirements. If a valid password
was entered, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new password.
CONFIRM PASSWORD
The user is prompted to re-enter the new Local Setpoints Password. If the passwords do
not match, an ENTRY MISMATCH message will appear, the password will remain
unchanged, and the user will be returned to the Enter New Password page. If the
passwords match, a PASSWORD CHANGED message will appear indicating the Local
Setpoints Password has successfully been updated.
PASSWORD FOR RESET KEY
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
If set to Enabled, a PASSWORD is required to reset Trip/Alarm LEDs and events when
pressing the Reset key. If set to Disabled, no password will be required.
When password security is enabled, the PSWD FOR RESET KEY is available, and set to
Disabled by default. Changing the value of "PSWD FOR RESET KEY" requires the Master
Password. If the Master Password has already been provided by the current user, further
password confirmation is not required for this setpoint (the 5 minutes of inactivity rule
does not apply).

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Communications
Figure 6-4: Main communications menu

S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
ETHERNET
MODBUS PROTOCOL
ٕ
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-104*
DNP PROTOCOL
GOOSE CONFIGURATION**

* Available with comms Order Code 1

** Available with comms Order Code 2
897766A2.cdr

RS485 interface The 345 is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. The RS485 port has
settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the
settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. This
port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software. This
software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade
the device firmware. A maximum of 32 3-series devices can be daisy-chained and
connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 port.
Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the EnerVista 3 Series
Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on
the display, to configure the serial port.
The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port.
BAUD RATE
Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 115200
This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port.
PARITY
Range: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port.
REAR RS485 PROTOCOL
Range: Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0
Default: Modbus
This setting specifies the protocol to be used for the rear RS485 port.

Ethernet Select the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET path on the
display or EnerVista 3 Series Setup program, to configure the Ethernet port.
The following settings are available to configure the Ethernet port.
IP ADDRESS
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the IP Address for the Ethernet port.
SUBNET IP MASK
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 255.255.252.0
This setting specifies the Subnet IP Mask setting for the Ethernet port.

6–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

GATEWAY IP ADDRESS
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet port.
CONNECTION TYPE
Range: Copper, fiber
Default: Copper
This setting specifies the connection type (Copper or Fiber) used for Ethernet
communication.
HIGH ETHERNET MSG ENABLE/DISABLE
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
This setting enables or disables the High Ethernet traffic message from appearing under
high Ethernet traffic conditions.
When changing Ethernet settings, power to the relay must be cycled in order for the new
NOTE:

settings to become active.

NOTE

Modbus The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the 345 . Modbus is available via the RS485
serial link (Modbus RTU). The 345 always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never
initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master
device. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive
monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
Refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for additional details on the Modbus protocol
and the Modbus memory map.
The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. The server is
capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in
the device. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented.
The 345 operates as a Modbus slave device only
Select the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in EnerVista
3 Series Setup software, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS >
MODBUS PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below.
Figure 6-5: Modbus protocol configuration settings

The following Modbus settings are available:

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Default: 254
This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . Each device must have a unique
address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave
devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the
same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to
the link should use the next higher address starting at 1.
Please refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus
communications protocol.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

IEC 60870-5-103 serial Figure 6-6: IEC 60870-5-103 serial communications settings
communication

PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-103

Please refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details on how to set up the IEC
60870-5-103 serial communications protocol.
For a complete list of Binary inputs, see Format Code FC134B in the 3 Series
Communications Guide. Note that the format codes differ for each relay model.

IEC60870-5-104 Figure 6-7: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol settings

protocol

PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-104

Please refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details on how to set up the
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
For a complete list of Binary inputs, see Format Code FC134B in the 3 Series
Communications Guide. Note that the format codes differ for each relay model.

DNP communication Figure 6-8: DNP communication settings

PATH: SETPOINTS > RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL > DNP GENERAL
Please refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details on how to set up the DNP
protocol.
For a complete list of Binary inputs, see Format Code FC134B in the 3 Series
Communications Guide. Note that the format codes differ for each relay model.

6–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

3 Series IEC 61850 The 345 firmware supports IEC61850 GOOSE communications on the optional
GOOSE details communications daughter board.
Portions of the IEC61850 standard not pertaining to GOOSE, are not implemented in the
345 .
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) standard ISO/IEC 9506 is only supported
when GOOSE type is set to “Advanced” (under S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS >
GOOSE CONFIGURATION > TRANSMISSION) and the Communications order code option
includes IEC 61850.
The 345 does not support
• the mapping of analogue values to data points in data sets in either the transmit or
receive direction
• a file system to maintain SCL, ICD or CID files, for IEC61850 GOOSE. As such the
implementation stores GOOSE configuration using MODBUS set points.
Configuration of transmission and reception settings for the GOOSE feature are performed
using EnerVista 3 Series Setup software.
The 345 firmware accepts GOOSE messages from UR, F650 and UR Plus. The
interoperability with other manufacturers will be guaranteed in almost all cases, by
implementing the reception side with nested structures (one level of nesting) and all the
standard data types.
GOOSE settings changes will take effect only after the 345 is re-booted. One setting is
available to Enable/Disable both Transmission and Reception. It is possible to change this
setting from the Front Panel of the relay.
Figure 6-9: EnerVista 3 Series GOOSE General Settings

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Event recorder
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in a non-volatile memory where the information is maintained for up to 3 days
in case of lost relay control power.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > EVENT RECORDER
PICKUP EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events that occur when a
protection element picks up.
DROPOUT EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When set to “Enabled” the event recorder records the dropout state of a protection
element.
TRIP EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
The trip events include all programmed relay elements set to trip the breaker. The text
“TRIP” followed by the name of the operated element is recorded.
ALARM EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
These events include the elements programmed as an “ALARM” or “LATCHED ALARM”
function, which detect power system conditions considered as an alarm.
CONTROL EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
If set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the
programmed control elements.
BLOCK EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, an event will be triggered upon activation of any block signal.
CONTACT INPUTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder will record the event, when a contact input
changes its state.
LOGIC ELEMENT
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
change of any programmed remote input.

6–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

VIRTUAL INPUTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
changes of any logic element.
REMOTE INPUTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
change of any programmed remote input.
SETTING DATE/TIME
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the event of the changing of the date
and time.

Transient recorder
The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the
other relay data at the point of trigger. By default, the Transient Recorder captures data for
all analog currents: Winding 1 three-phase currents and ground, and Winding 2 three-
phase currents and ground. Triggering of the transient recorder occurs, when an event is
detected, causing a pickup, trip, dropout, or alarm, any one of which has been "Enabled" to
activate the trigger. The transient recorder trigger may also be activated when any of the
selected trigger inputs 1 to 3 is detected as having “On” status.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > TRANSIENT RECDR
NUM OF RECORDS
Range: 1, 3, 6
Default: 1
This setpoint selects the desired number of records to be saved in the memory.
SAMPLING RATE
Range: 4, 8, 16, 32
Default: 4
This setpoint defines the sampling rate at which transient records will be recorded.
TRIGGER MODE
Range: Overwrite, Protected
Default: Overwrite
When the “Overwrite” setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones,
meaning the relay will always keep the newest records. In “Protected” mode, the relay
will keep the number of records corresponding to the selected number, only without
overwriting.
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 20%
This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of
record. For example at 20% selected trigger position, the length of each record will be
split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

TRIGGER ON PKP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Pickup condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON DPO
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon a Dropout condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON TRIP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Trip condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON ALARM
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Alarm condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Selection of input or logic element from the settings range enables triggering input for
the recorder. A record will be triggered if the status of the selected input changes to “On”.

Fault report
The 345 relay has a Fault Report which captures measured analog signals at the time of
the trip. The Fault Report stores only the last recorded values in relay's non-volatile
memory. The Fault Report has two configurable setpoints, "FAULT TRIGGER" and "DELAY
OTHER TRIGGERS". The high state of the selected Fault Trigger operand will trigger the Fault
Report. The default setting is ANY TRIP. The time delay setting is provided for selection of
time to override any subsequent triggers following the first trigger and prevent losing
information from the record. When this time delay elapses, the fault record can be
updated if new trip exists. The recorded values from the Fault Report can be seen in:
ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > FAULT REPORT.
The Fault Report header includes the following information:
• Relay model
• Device name
• Firmware revision
• Date and time of trigger
• Name of the trip trigger
• Active setting group at the time of trigger
• All measured analog signals - currents, voltages
The Fault Report runs continuously, capturing and storing the last trip in non-volatile
memory, where the information is maintained even if relay control power is lost. This
record is updated when the fault record delay has elapsed and a new trips occur.

6–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FAULT REPORT
FAULT RECORD TRIGGER
Range: Off, Any Trip, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32,
Logic Element 1 to 16
Default: Any Trip
This setting selects an operand for triggering the report. The report is triggered at the
rising edge of the selected trigger operand. To avoid inaccuracies during the fault
transient period, data from one cycle after the trigger is collected.
FAULT RECORD DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies the time delay after the first trip trigger for the Fault Report, during
which the record is not updated with any subsequent trip triggers.

Front panel with non-programmable LEDs

The user can send a message to the display, that will override any normal message by
sending text through Modbus. Refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for register
details.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for
several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These
messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the
display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on
the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min
Default: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off
the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen
messages.
W1 BKR OPEN COLOR
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

W1 BKR CLSD COLOR

Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions.
W2 BKR OPEN COLOR
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.
W2 BKR CLSD COLOR
Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions.

Front panel with programmable LEDs

The front panel ordered with programmable LEDs (option L) provides 4 non-programmable
and 8 programmable LEDs. The first column of four LEDs (on the left) are non-
programmable LEDs. The next two columns of LEDs are programmable; they can be
triggered by a selected operand from a list of logic operands, and can be programmed to
be either Self-Reset or Latched. The LED color for LED5 to LED8 can also be programmed.
By default the programmable LEDs are all Off, with no source selected.
The LEDs on the relay front panel are ordered as shown:

STATUS

IN SERVICE LED 1 LED 5

TROUBLE LED 2 LED 6

LED 3 LED 7
TRIP

ALARM LED 4 LED 8

898862A1.CDR
Programmable LEDs can be configured using the keypad or the EnerVista 3 Series
Setup software as described in Chapter 3 - Software Setup.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for
several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These
messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the
display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.

6–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP

MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on
the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min
Default: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off
the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen
messages.
LED1(8) SOURCE
Range: Any operand from the list of logic operands
Default: Off
Selects the signal source of programmable LED 1 through 8.
LED1(8) TYPE
Range: Self-reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
Selects the type of programmable LED 1 through 8.
LED5(8) COLOR
Range: Off, Red, Orange, Green
Default: Orange
Selects the color of programmable LED 5 through 8.
Note that programmable LEDs 1 through 4 have fixed colors: LED1 (Red), LED2 (Orange),
NOTE:

LED3 (Orange), LED4 (Orange).

NOTE

Figure 6-10: Programmable LED with Trigger SOURCE and Self-reset or Latched TYPE

Command
RESET

SETPOINT
LED 1 Type
Latched LED 1 to 8
AND

S
Self-Reset
LATCH

SETPOINTS R
OR

LED 1 Source
Off = 0, Logic Operand =1
AND
AND

898863A1.CDR
Logic Operand = 1

When the LED TYPE is Latched, the LED stays lit even after the value of the operand (flag)
selected as a trigger drops down (resets). The LED can be turned off by either pressing the
RESET pushbutton, or by executing a reset command via communications. When the LED
TYPE is Self-reset, the LED resets after the logic operand value drops down (resets).

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Installation
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION
RELAY NAME
Range: Feeder Name, Alpha-numeric (14 characters)
Default: Feeder Name
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will
appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which
are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel.
RELAY STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready
Default: Not Ready
Allows the user to activate/deactivate the relay. The relay is not operational when set to
"Not Ready."

6–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

S2 System Setup
Figure 6-11: Main system setup menu

S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING
POWER SYSTEM
TRANSFORMER
▼
WNDG 1 BREAKER
WNDG 2 BREAKER

897765A3.cdr

Current sensing
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers
associated with Winding 1.
W1 PH CT SECONDARY
Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 1 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the
rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated
with Winding 1.
W1 GND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers
associated with Winding 1.
W1 GND CT SECONDARY
Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 1 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the
rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with
Winding 1.
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers
associated with Winding 2.
W2 PH CT SECONDARY
Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 1 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the
rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated
with Winding 2.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

W2 GND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers
associated with Winding 2.
W2 GND CT SECONDARY
Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 1 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the
rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with
Winding 2.

Power system
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
Enter the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the
optimal digital sampling rate.
SYSTEM ROTATION
Range: ABC, ACB,
Default: ABC
Enter the phase sequence of the power system.

Transformer
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER
XFMR RATED LOAD
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 MVA in steps of 0.01
Default: 5.00 MVA
Enter the self-cooled (100%) load rating for the power transformer.
TRANSFORMER TYPE
Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table
Default: y/y0
Select the transformer connection from a list of transformer types shown in table 6-1
“Transformer types” .
PHASE COMPENSATION
Range: Internal (software), External (withCTs)
Default: Internal (software)
Select the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay. If set to “Internal
(software)”, the transformer magnitude and phase shift compensations are performed
internally by the relay algorithm. If set to “External (with CT’s)”, the transformer phase
shift is externally compensated by the CT connections. The relay still performs
magnitude compensation when the “External (with CTs)” option is selected.
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 KV in steps of 0.01
Default: 13.80 KV
Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 1 of the transformer.

6–22 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

W1 GROUNDING
Range: Not Within Zone, Within Zone
Default: Not Within Zone
Select the setting “Within Zone”, if there is a grounding path at Winding 1 side of the
transformer such as grounded neutral, grounding transformer, or grounded corner of a
delta winding. Select “Not Within Zone”, if there is no grounding path for Winding 1 in the
zone.
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 KV in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.16 KV
Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 2 of the transformer.
W2 GROUNDING
Range: Not Within Zone, Within Zone
Default: Not Within Zone
Select the setting “Within Zone”, if there is a grounding path at the Winding 2 side of the
transformer, such as grounded neutral, grounding transformer, or grounded corner of a
delta winding. Select “Not Within Zone”, if there is no grounding path for Winding 2 in the
zone.
The Delta connection of CTs inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence
components of the phase currents. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding
of the power transformer within the zone of protection, a ground fault would result in
differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. In such case, it would be necessary to
insert a zero sequence current trap with the wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of
the transformer.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of
one transformer winding but not the other winding. Transformer windings that are
grounded inside zone protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding, and
therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.

Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations

Percent (biased) differential protection is the main type of protection for power
transformers with respect to detecting all types of transformer internal faults. This
protection is based on Kirchoff’s Law where the algebraic sum of all currents flowing in
and out of the protected equipment is equal to zero. However, when applying this law to
transformer protection, one should keep in mind that direct summation of the measured
per-phase transformer currents does not automatically result in a zero differential current.
This is because:
1. The transformer voltage ratio results in different winding nominal currents.
2. The winding CTs are not rated to exactly match the winding nominal currents.
3. Physically, the transformer windings are connected in Delta, Wye, or Zig-Zag
configuration, and each introduces a phase shift.
For correct performance of percent differential protection, it is necessary to adjust the
magnitude and phase relationships of the CT secondary currents for each winding, in order
to obtain near zero differential currents under normal transformer operating conditions.
Traditionally, the phase shift between the currents from the transformer windings has
been adjusted by connecting the CTs from the Wye winding in Delta connection, and the
CTs from the Delta winding in Wye connection. The magnitude of this adjustment is
accomplished using interposing CTs, or tapped relay windings. This, however, is not
required when the 345 relay is installed.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

The 345 relay simplifies the process by performing the magnitude and phase shift
compensations automatically (internally). Upon receiving entered settings for the
protected transformer and winding CT ratings, the relay automatically calculates and
applies the correct magnitude of scaling to the winding currents, as well as the correct
phase shift, in order to prepare the currents for summation. In order to performing the
appropriate current compensation, all winding CTs must be connected in Wye (polarity
markings pointing away from the transformer).
Magnitude Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay
uses the user-entered phase-to-phase voltage and the CT primary settings for Winding 1
as a reference for current magnitude compensation.
Phase Shift Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay
uses either the Delta or the Zig-Zag currents (depending on the transformer setup) as a
phase shift reference to perform the phase shift compensation. When a Wye/Wye
transformer is selected in the setup, the currents from the first Wye winding are used as a
reference for the phase shift compensation.
EXAMPLE:
This section describes the process of automatic current magnitude and phase shift
compensation using a specific example that shows how CT ratios, transformer voltage
ratios, and transformer phase shifts are used to generate the correction factors. These
correction factors are applied to the current signals to obtain extremely accurate
differential currents. The menu paths in the example are shown graphically in the above
figure.
Consider a typical Wye/Delta power transformer with the following data:
• Connection: Y/d30° (i.e. delta winding phase currents lag the corresponding wye
winding phase currents by 30°)
• Transformer rated load: 5/7/9 MVA
• Winding 1: 13.8 kV nominal, 500/5 CT ratio
• Winding 2: 4.16 kV nominal, 1500/5 CT ratio.
The following sections will illustrate auto-configuration principles using in the example.
The current transformer ratings per each winding are entered as:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W1 PHASE CT PRIMARY: “500 A”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W2 PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1500 A”
The transformer type is entered as:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE: “Y/d30”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > XFMR RATED LOAD: “5 MVA”
S2 SYSTEM SETU > TRANSFORMER > W1 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: “13.8 kV”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W1 GROUNDING: “Within Zone”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: “4.16 kV”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 GROUNDING: “Not Within Zone”
AUTOMATIC CT MISMATCH COMPENSATION
The 1500/5 CT on winding 2 does not perfectly match the 500/5 CT on Winding 1. The
perfectly matched winding 2 CT primary at nominal winding 2 voltage is calculated as
follows:

Eq. 1
where:
CT1 = Winding 1 CT primary rating
V1 = Winding 1 nominal voltage
CT2 = Winding 2 CT primary rating
V2 = Winding 2 nominal voltage

6–24 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Thus, for any load, the Winding 2 CT secondary current is higher (per unit) than the
Winding 1 CT secondary current. The mismatch factor is 1658.6 / 1500 = 1.1057.
The 345 relay calculates the magnitude correction factor for Winding 2 as follows:

Eq. 2
The 345 calculates and automatically corrects the CT mismatch to a maximum mismatch
factor of 16.
Hence, the measured currents from winding 2 will be automatically compensated by the
relay applying the correction factor of 0.904. The currents from winding 1 are not
multiplied by any correction factor, as they are always used by the relay as a magnitude
reference.
Based on 100% transformer loading (5MVA), the measured winding currents are:
Winding 1 CT: measured

Eq. 3
- winding 1 nominal current
Winding 2 CT: measured

Eq. 4
- winding 2 nominal current
Based on 100% transformer loading, the compensated currents expressed in times CT (w1)
as a reference and used by the percent differential protection will be as shown:

Eq. 5

Eq. 6
PHASE SHIFT COMPENSATION
The source phase sequence must be stated when describing the winding phase
relationships since these relationships change when the phase sequence changes. The
example below shows why this happens, using a transformer described in IEC
nomenclature as “Yd1” or in GE Multilin nomenclature as “Y/d30.”
Figure 6-12: Example transformer
A B C N
IA IB IC

Ia' Ib' Ic'

Ia = Ia' – Ic' Ib = Ib' – Ia' Ic = Ic' – Ib'

a b c 897716A1.CDR

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

The above figure shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a
phase angle in the delta winding lagging the respective wye winding by 30°. The winding
currents are also identified. Note that the total current out of the delta winding is described
by an equation. Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ABC, is connected to
transformer terminals ABC, respectively. The currents that would be present for a balanced
load are shown below.
Figure 6-13: Phasors for ABC sequence

897717A1.CDR

Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30°, which is in
agreement with the transformer nameplate.
Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals
A, C, B respectively. The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown
below:
Figure 6-14: Phasors for ACB sequence

828718A1.CDR

Note that the delta winding currents leads the wye winding currents by 30°, (which is a
type Yd11 in IEC nomenclature and a type Y/d330 in GE Multilin nomenclature) which is in
disagreement with the transformer nameplate. This is because the physical connections
and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed.
The transformer nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated
phase sequence.

6–26 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

It may be suggested that for the ACB sequence the phase relationship can be returned to
that shown on the transformer nameplate by connecting source phases A, B and C to
transformer terminals A, C, and B respectively. This will restore the nameplate phase shifts
but will cause incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay, and is therefore
not recommended.
All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A, B and C
terminals to the power system phases A, B and C respectively. The transformer types and
phase relationships presented are for a system phase sequence of ABC, in accordance
with the standards for power transformers. Users with a system phase sequence of ACB
must determine the transformer type for this sequence.
The following diagram shows the internal connections of the Y/d30? transformer from our
example:

WINDING 1 (WYE)
A B C N

a b c
WINDING 2 (DELTA)

The 345 performs this phase angle correction internally based on the following setpoint.
Set S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE to “Y/d30°”.
The 345 supports all standard two-winding transformer types. Each transformer type from
the Transformer Types table below provides the following information:

transformer type notation as it appears on the display

winding connection (wye, delta, or zig-zag)
and ground CT assignment
angle by which a winding lags winding 1
diagrams showing the phase
relationships of voltage phasors,
where (the arrow sign)
indicates the reference phase
Transformer type Wdg. Voltage Phase
Connection phasors shift

1 WYE 30° lag

(gnd 1/2)
Y/d30°
2 DELTA 0°
30° Lag

897721A1.CDR

phase angle correction (or phase shift)

that is initially performed to calculate
differential currents
As shown in the “Y/d30°” entry of the transformer types table, the 30° lag of the Delta
results into 0° phase shift applied to its currents (Delta –phase reference), and 30° phase
angle correction (phase shift) applied to the winding 1 currents (Wye winding). These angle
corrections are described in the table as Phase shift.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

In our example, the transformer has the Y-D connection. Traditionally, CTs on the Wye
connected transformer winding (winding 1) would be connected in a delta arrangement,
which compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the Delta connected winding
(winding 2), so that line currents from both windings can be compared at the relay. The
Delta connection of CTs, however, inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence
components of the phase currents. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding of
the power transformer within the zone of protection, a ground fault would result in
differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. In such a case, it would be necessary to
insert a zero sequence current trap with the Wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of
the transformer.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of
one transformer winding but not the other winding. Transformer windings that are
grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding,
and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.
The 345 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal
automatically, based on the settings entered for the transformer. All CTs are connected
Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). All currents are phase and
zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint
quantities.
The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding which will have a phase shift of 0° applied
to it. The phase reference winding is chosen to be the delta or zigzag (non-wye) winding
with the lowest winding index, if one exists. For a transformer that has no delta or zigzag
windings, the first winding is chosen.
The phase compensation angle Φ?comp is the angle by which a winding current is shifted
to refer it to the phase reference winding, and is calculated by the 345 for each winding as
follows:

Eq. 7
where Rotation = “ABC”

Eq. 8
where Rotation = “ACB”
In our example, the phase reference winding would be winding 2 (i.e. wf = 2). The phase
compensation angle for each winding would then be calculated as follows (assuming
Rotation = “ABC”):

Eq. 9
TRANSFORMER TYPES
A complete table of two-winding transformer types is shown below.

6–28 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Table 6-1: Transformer types

Transformer Wdg. Connection Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg. Connection Voltage Phase
Type Phasors Shift Type Phasors Shift
(Φcomp) (Φcomp)
2W External 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 0° Y/y0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 0°
Correction

2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 0° 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 0° 0°

Y/y180° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 180° lag Y/d30° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag

2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 180° 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0°

lag 30° lag

Y/d150° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 150° lag Y/d210° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 210° lag

2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0°

150° lag 210° lag

Y/d330° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 330° lag D/d0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 0°

2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0° 0°

330° lag

D/d60° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 60° lag D/d120° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 120° lag

2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0°

60° lag 120° lag

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Transformer Wdg. Connection Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg. Connection Voltage Phase
Type Phasors Shift Type Phasors Shift
(Φcomp) (Φcomp)
D/d180° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 180° lag D/d240° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 240° lag

2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0°

180° lag 240° lag

D/d300° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 300° lag D/y30° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 0°

2 DELTA (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 30° 330° lag

300° lag lag

D/y150° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 0° D/y210° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 0°

2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 150° 210° lag 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 210° 150° lag
lag lag

D/y330° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 0° Y/z30° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag

2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 330° 30° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0°

lag 30° lag

Y/z150° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 150° lag Y/z210° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 210° lag

2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0°

150° lag 210° lag

6–30 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Transformer Wdg. Connection Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg. Connection Voltage Phase
Type Phasors Shift Type Phasors Shift
(Φcomp) (Φcomp)
Y/z330° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 330° lag D/z0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 0°

2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0°

330° lag 0° lag

D/z60° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 60° lag D/z120° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 120° lag

2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0°

60° lag 120° lag

D/z180° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 180° lag D/z240° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 240° lag

2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0°

180° lag 240° lag

D/z300° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/2) 300° lag 3W External 1 WYE 0°

Correction

2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° 23 WYE 0° 0°

300° lag
WYE 0° 0°

The following table shows the linear combination of phases of a transformer winding that
achieves the phase shift and zero sequence removal for typical values of Φcomp:
where:
IA[w] = uncompensated winding ‘w’ phase A current
IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding ‘w’ phase A current.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Table 6-2:
ΦCOMP[W] GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE" GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE"
0°

30° lag

60° lag

90° lag

120° lag

150° lag

180° lag

210° lag

6–32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

ΦCOMP[W] GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE" GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE"

240° lag

270° lag

300° lag

330° lag

MAGNITUDE, PHASE ANGLE, AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION

Transformer magnitude, phase angle, and zero-sequence compensation calculations
Complete magnitude, phase angle, and zero sequence compensation is as follows:
Winding 1 compensated currents:

Winding 2 compensated currents:

where:

- magnitude, phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents

- magnitude compensation factor for winding 2 (see previous sections)

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

- phase and zero sequence compensated winding phase currents (see earlier).
In our example, the following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations would
be used:
For Winding 1 (Wye – grounded neutral):

For Winding 2 (Delta):

The complete compensated winding 1 and winding 2 currents would be as follows:

DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENT CALCULATIONS

Differential currents are calculated as follows:

Restraint currents are calculated as follows:

where,

are the phase differential currents, and

6–34 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP

are the phase restraint currents.

Per the example, the per-phase differential and restraint currents would be as follows:

Winding breakers
The status of the Winding 1 breaker is monitored by the 345 relay using the status of either
one or two contact inputs, 52a (CI#1) and 52b (CI#2), wired to the Winding 1 breaker
auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b, and the status of the Winding 2 breaker 52a (CI#3) and 52b
(CI#4) wired to Winding 2 breaker aux contacts 52a and 52b respectively (see below).
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 1 BREAKER
52a CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 1
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 1 [52a (CI#1)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52a.
52b CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 2
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 2 [52b (CI#2)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52b.
BKR CONNECTED
Range: Contact Input 5 to 10, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or
disconnect switches switched-on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches
switched-off) to the system.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 2 BREAKER
52a CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 3
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 3 [52a (CI#3)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact
52a.
52b CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 4
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 4 [52b (CI#4)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact
52b.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

BKR CONNECTED
Range: Contact Input 5 to 10, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or
disconnect switches switched-on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches
switched-off) to the system.
It is highly recommended to monitor the status of the Winding 1 and Winding 2 breakers
NOTE:

using both breaker auxiliary contacts 52a, and 52b; however using only one of them is also
NOTE acceptable.

The 345 can detect the breaker status by using only one contact: either 52a or 52b.
However, one should be aware that in such cases, it would be impossible to distinguish
between a breaker open state and breaker racked out state, unless another contact from
the breaker is wired to the relay.To clarify this ambiguity, the BKR CONNECTED function
under SETPOINTS/S2 SYSTEM SETUP/S2 BREAKER should be programmed to an additional
contact input. When this additional input is closed, a single 52a or 52b contact will show
both breaker states. When the breaker is racked out, this additional breaker connected
input should be open. In this case, both breaker status indicators will be off.
The logic for Breaker Open, and Breaker Close status is shown in the table below:
Table 6-3: Breaker open / Breaker closed status logic
52a contact 52b contact Breaker status
configured configured
Open Close
Yes Yes 52a contact open 52a contact closed
52b contact closed 52b contact open
Yes No 52a contact open 52a contact closed
No Yes 52b contact closed 52b contact open
No No Status unknown

If the contact input selected under BKR CONNECTED setting is asserted, the breaker is
considered connected to the primary system. When the breaker is determined
disconnected, the breaker state is shown to be neither open, nor closed.
Table 6-4: Breaker status with both contacts configured
52a contact status 52b contact status Breaker status
Off On open
On Off closed
On On BKR status failure
Off Off BKR status failure

6–36 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

S3 Protection
The 345 protection elements are organized in two identical setpoint groups: Setpoint
Group 1 and Setpoint Group 2.
Figure 6-15: Main Protection menu

S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1/2

XFMR PCNT DIFF
XFMR INST DIFF
RESTD GND FAULT1
ٕ
RESTD GND FAULT2
THERMAL OVERLOAD
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC2
PHASE IOC1
PHASE IOC2
GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC2
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOC2
NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL TOC2
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC2
NEG SEQ TOC1
NEG SEQ TOC2
NEG SEQ IOC1
NEG SEQ IOC2
897798A2. cdr

Breaker tripping
Tripping the winding breakers in the 345 relay is performed by energizing Output Relay 1
(RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP) and Output Relay 2 (RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP). Most of the 345 protection,
control, and monitoring elements can be configured to trip one of the two winding
breakers, or both breakers together. In these cases, selecting to trip only one specific
breaker, or both together, can be configured in the menu of the element as follows:
1. Set the main function setpoint in the element menu (for example, PH TOC1 FUNCTION)
to Trip.
This adds the setpoints RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR used for tripping the
Winding 1 and Winding 2 breakers respectively. These setpoints are only visible when
the FUNCTION setpoint is set to Trip, and supports triping individual breakers.
2. Set one or both of the setpoints RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR to Operate
to enable triggering the corresponding output relay or relays upon operation of the
element.
A few 345 elements, such as Percent Differential, Instantaneous Differential, Restricted
NOTE:

Ground Fault, and Thermal Overload, can only trip both breakers together. Elements that
NOTE only trip both breakers specify this behavior in the main FUNCTION setpoint description.

For example, the following screenshot shows the EnerVista 3 Series Setup software menu
for Phase Timed Overcurrent (51P), with the function setpoint Phase TOC1 Function set to
Disabled.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

When the function setpoint is changed to Trip, additional setpoints can be configured as
shown.

Setting Phase TOC1 Relay 1 Trip W1 Breaker to Operate results in output relay 1 (W1
breaker) tripping when the Phase TOC1 element operates.
Figure 6-16: Breaker tripping logic diagram

6–38 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Any Trip

The selection of Output Relays 1 “RLY1 TRIP W1

BKR” appears in Protection, Control and Monitoring
element menu when Function set to “Trip”

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR TRIP W1 BREAKER
From Element 1 menu
Operate = 1
.
. . To Output Relay 1

AND
.
“RLY 1 W1 BKR TRIP”
.

OR
. .
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
From Element N menu
Operate = 1

The selection of Output Relay 2 “RLY2 TRIP W2

BKR” appears in Protection, Control and Monitoring
element menu when Function set to “Trip”

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR TRIP W2 BREAKER
From Element 1 menu
Operate = 1
.
. . To Output Relay 2

AND
“RLY 2 W2 BKR TRIP”
. .
OR

. .
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
From Element N menu 897862A1.cdr
Operate = 1

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Transformer percent differential (87T)

The 345 provides one percent differential element per setpoint group. The settings menu of
the percent differential element defines a dual slope, dual breakpoint differential/restraint
characteristic. The calculation of differential and restraint currents are as shown on the
figure below.
Figure 6-17: Calculation of transformer differential (Id) and restraint (Ir) currents
Winding 1 Winding 2
current current
waveform waveform

Magnitude, phase
Phase angle and
angle and zero
zero sequence
sequence
compensation
compensation
(as required)
(as required)

Decaying dc Decaying dc
offset filter offset filter

Discrete Fourrier Discrete Fourrier

transform transform

S MAX

Differential Restraint
Current Current

897801.CDR

The 345 continuously calculates per-phase differential and restraint currents, and
compares their ratio with the user pre-defined differential/restraint characteristic. The
purpose of this characteristic is to provide a zone for differential protection operation, and
a zone for no operation, where the user can define protection sensitivity and dependability
during internal faults, and security during external faults.
The differential current is calculated per-phase as a vector sum of currents from both
windings after magnitude and angle compensation.

Eq. 10
The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated
currents:

Eq. 11

6–40 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Figure 6-18: Differential / Restraint characteristic

Idifferential (xCT)

SLOPE 2
100%

OPERATE REGION

Transition Region
(lineal)

SLOPE 1
25%
PICKUP
0.30
BREAKPOINT 1 BREAKPOINT 2 Irestraint (xCT)
897802.cdr

The figure above shows the differential/restraint characteristic of the main transformer
percent differential protection.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP1 > XFMR PCNT DIFF
XFMR DIFF FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate when the Trip setting is
selected and the Percent Differential protection is in operation.
MINIMUM PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CT
This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. The setting
is selected based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal
conditions. This differential current is a result of the transformer magnetizing current, CT
inaccuracies, and a transformer ratio that may change as a result of the transformer
on-load tap changer.
SLOPE 1
Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 30%
This setting is applicable for restraint (through) currents of zero to kneepoint 1, and
defines the ratio of differential/restraint currents, above which the element will operate.
The slope is set to ensure sensitivity of internal faults at normal transformer loading.
BREAK 1
Range: 0.50 to 4.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 1.50xCT
The setting for Breakpoint 1 defines the limit of linear operation of Winding 1 CT,
accounting for up to 80% of residual flux that effectively reduces the capability of the CT
by a factor of 5. Breakpoint 1 should be set below the current that would cause CT
saturation due to DC components and/or residual magnetism. Very often the Breakpoint
1 setting is based on the transformer Winding 1 nominal current (100% transformer

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

loading). In such cases, one should check whether or not this setting complies with the
above recommendation regarding the CT linear performance. This breakpoint marks the
end of slope 1, where no CT saturation is expected to restrain (through) currents smaller
than that breakpoint.
BREAK 2
Range: 1.00 to 10.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 1.5xCT
Breakpoint 2 should be set below the fault current that is most likely to saturate any of
the transformer CTs due to an AC component alone. The setting is expressed in times CT
primary of Winding 1. For example if 10 kA is the maximum AC through fault current
before Winding 2 CT (1000:5) starts to saturate, on a 5 MVA transformer with a ratio of
13.8kV/4.16kV, and a Winding1 CT (500:5) rating, the Breakpoint 2 setting will be
6.02 x CT.
In this example:

Fault current (W2) = 10kA

CT primary (W2) = 1000 A/(1 × CT)

௞௏(௪ଶ)×஼்(௪ଶ) ସ.ଵ଺ ௞௏ × (ଵ଴଴଴:ହ)

M(W2) = = = 0.602
௞௏(௪ଵ)×஼்(௪ଵ) ଵଷ.଼ ௞௏ × ହ଴଴:ହ

௙௔௨௟௧ ௖௨௥௥௘௡௧ (ௐଶ)×ெ(ௐଶ) ଵ଴ ௞஺ ×଴.଺଴ଶ

Breakpoint 2 = = = 6.02 ‫ܶܥ‬
஼் ௣௥௜௠௔௥௬ (ௐଶ) ଵ଴଴଴ ஺ /(ଵ ×஼்)

SLOPE 2
Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 95%
The Slope 2 setting ensures stability during fault conditions of the type that produce CT
saturation and spurious high differential current. Slope 2 should be set high to cater for
the worst case scenario where one set of CTs saturates, but the other set does not. In
such cases the differential/restraint ratio can go as high as 95% to 98%.
INRUSH INHBT FUNCT
Range: Disabled, 2nd Harm Block
Default: 2nd Harm Block
This setting enables or disables the inrush inhibit function. None of the settings for inrush
inhibit are active when the function is set to “Disabled”.
Figure 6-19: Transformer Inrush inhibiting

6–42 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

INRUSH INHBT LEVEL

Range: 0.1 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
Default: 10%
This setting specifies the ratio of 2nd harmonic differential current to the fundamental
frequency differential current for the selected mode of 2nd harmonic inhibit. The
percent differential protection will be blocked from operation if the actual ratio of the
differential 2nd harmonic current to the fundamental frequency differential current is
above this threshold.
INRUSH INHBT MODE
Range: "Per Phase", "1-out-of-3", "2-out-of-3", "Average"
Default: Per Phase
This setting specifies the mode of blocking during transformer magnetizing (inrush)
conditions.
If set to “Per phase,” the function performs inrush inhibit for each phase individually.
If set to “1-out-of-3,” the relay checks the 2nd harmonic level per-phase differential
current, and blocks the differential protection for all three phases, if the 2nd harmonic on
any one of the three phases is higher than the setting for inrush inhibit level.
If set to “2-out-of-3,” the relay checks the 2nd harmonic level onthe per-phase
differential current, and blocks the differential protection for all three phases if the 2nd
harmonic on any two of these three phases is higher than the setting for the inrush
inhibit level.
If set to “Average,” the relay calculates the average 2nd harmonic level and compares
this level against the setting for the inrush inhibit level. Averaging of the 2nd harmonics
is adaptive and depends on the magnitude of the differential current per-phase. If the
differential current on any of the three phases goes below the differential current cut-off
level of 0.04 x CT, the 2nd harmonic current from that phase gets dropped (zeroed) from
the equation for averaging, and the dividing number (divisor) is decreased from 3 to 2.
The same happens if the magnitude of the differential current on one of the two
remaining phases drops below the cutoff level during energization. In this case the 2nd
harmonic on this phase will be dropped from summation, and the dividing number
(divisor) will be decreased to 1.
OVEREXCIT INHIBIT
Range: Disabled, 5th Harm
Default: Disabled
This setting provides 5th harmonic differential protection blocking during an
overexcitation condition that results from an increased V/Hz ratio.
Such an overexcitation condition from an increased V/Hz ratio, poses a danger to the
protected transformer. A given transformer can tolerate an overfluxing condition for a
limited time, as the danger is associated with thermal processes in the core. So
instantaneous tripping of the transformer by the differential protection is not desirable.
The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic ratio for inhibiting the differential function
during overexcitation conditions.
OVEREX INHT LEVEL
Range: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
Default: 10.0%
This setting specifies the level of 5th harmonic during overexcitation (overfluxing)
transformer conditions. When the 5th harmonic level exceeds the specified OVEREX
INHT LEVEL setting (5th harmonic ratio) the differential element is blocked. The
overexcitation inhibit works on a per-phase basis.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–44
Command
RESET
S3 PROTECTION

LED: ALARM

AND
SETPOINT
LATCH
PERCENT DIFF R

OR
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0

AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm

OR
Trip
LED: TRIP

LED: PICKUP Operate Output Relay 1

AND
SETPOINT (W1 BKR TRIP)

MINIMUM PICKUP: Operate Output Relay 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SETPOINT (W2 BKR TRIP)
Event Recorder

OR
SLOPE 1
BLOCK 1: Trip
Transient Recorder
Off = 0 (To Breaker Failure )
BLOCK 1/2/3

BREAKPOINT 1
BLOCK 2: Message

AND
BREAKPOINT 2
Off = 0 PCNT DIFF PKP

OR
Event Recorder
BLOCK 3: SLOPE 2 PCNT DIFF PH A PKP
Off = 0 PCNT DIFF PH B PKP Transient Recorder
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL
PCNT DIFF PH C PKP
RUN
Differential Currents
Phase A Diff Current (IAd)
Phase B Diff Current (IBd)
SETPOINT

AND
Phase C Diff Current (ICd)
OUTPUT RELAY X
OR

Restraint Currents
For details see Common setpoints.

RUN
Phase A Rest Current (IAr) Do Not Operate, Operate

Phase B Rest Current (IBr)

Phase C Rest Current (ICr)
AND

Message

RUN PCNT DIFF OP

SETPOINT
PCNT DIFF PH A OP
INRUSH INHIBIT
FUNCTION PCNT DIFF PH B OP
PCNT DIFF PH C OP
AND

Disabled = 0
2nd harmonic

SETPOINT
Figure 6-20: Percent Differential Protection logic diagram

Differential 2nd Harmonic

INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL
Phase A current (IA2d) Event Recorder
INRUSH INHIBIT MODE
Phase B current (IB2d)
RUN
Phase C current (IC2d) IA2d = LEVEL 2ND HMNC DIFF PH A
RUN
SETPOINT IB2d = LEVEL 2ND HMNC DIFF PH B
OVEREXCITATION RUN
INHIBIT FUNCTION IC2d = LEVEL 2ND HMNC DIFF PH C
Disabled = 0
SETPOINT
5th harmonic =1
OVEREXC INHIBIT LEVEL Event Recorder
Differential 5th Harmonic RUN
IA5d = LEVEL 5TH HMNC DIFF PH A
Phase A current (IA5d)
Phase B current (IB5d) RUN
IB5d = LEVEL 5TH HMNC DIFF PH B
Phase C current (IC5d)
RUN 897803A1.cdr
IC5d = LEVEL 5TH HMNC DIFF PH C
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Transformer instantaneous differential (50/87)

The 345 relay provides one Instantaneous Differential element per setpoint group.
Instantaneous Differential protection is not biased protection and operates in a fashion
similar to instantaneous overcurrent protection. Inputs to this protection are computed on
the basis of the relay per-phase differential currents. Operation occurs if the value of any
of the computed phase differential currents is above the instantaneous differential pickup
setting.
Instantaneous Differential protection is usually set to operate during high-fault current
situations, and if used, its pickup is set according to the following criteria:
• The pickup setting (xCT) is selected to be higher than the maximum inrush current
during transformer energization
• The pickup setting is set higher than the fault current for faults occurring outside the
zone of protection
• The pickup setting is selected to be lower than the maximum fault current during
internal fault conditions.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > XFMR INST DIFF
INST DIFF FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
The output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate, when the Trip setting is
selected, and the Instantaneous Differential protection is operational.
INST DIFF PICKUP
Range: 3.00 – 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01 xCT
Default: 8.00xCT
This setting defines the pickup level of the differential current required for operation.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
INST DIFF BLOCK1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–46
S3 PROTECTION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S

AND
SETPOINT LATCH

R
INST DIFF FUNCTION:
OR

Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm
Alarm

OR
LED: TRIP
Trip

Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP)

AND

Operate Output Relay 2 (W1 BKR TRIP)

SETPOINT
Trip
BLOCK 1: (To Breaker Failure )
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:

AND
Off = 0

OR
SETPOINT
BLOCK 3:
INST DIFFERENTIAL
Off = 0 PICKUP: LED: PICKUP
RUN
IAd = Pickup
Phase Differential Currents SETPOINT
Phase A Diff current (IAd) RUN OUTPUT RELAY X
OR

IBd = Pickup
Phase B Diff current (IBd)
Do Not Operate, Operate
Phase C Diff current (ICd) RUN
Figure 6-21: Instantaneous Differential Protection logic diagram

Message
ICd = Pickup
INST DIFF PKP
INST DIFF OP

Event Recorder
INST DIFF PKP
897804A1.cdr
INST DIFF OP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Restricted ground fault (87G or RGF)

Depending on the SR345 order code, the relay provides up to two Restricted Ground Fault
elements per setpoint group; one per winding.
The Restricted Ground Fault (RGF) protection provides ground fault detection for low-
magnitude ground fault currents primarily for ground faults closed to the neutral point of
the wye connected winding. An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded wye
winding will produce a low magnitude ground fault current depending on position of the
fault with respect of the winding neutral point. See the diagrams below, expressing the
dependence of the fault current with respect to the fault distance from the neutral point.
The resultant primary current can be negligible for ground winding faults within 30%
distance from the neutral point since the fault voltage is not the system voltage, but rather
the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of
shorted turns. Therefore, the resultant differential currents may be below the pickup and/
or the slope setting of the main differential element, where the fault will go undetected.
Application of the restricted ground fault protection extends the fault coverage towards
the neutral point.
Figure 6-22: RGF and percent differential zones of protection
WINDING

35%

RGF DIFFERENTIAL
ZONE ZONE

Rg

Figure 6-23: Fault currents vs points from neutral

100

90

80

70
% Max Ifault

60

50 Ifault

40

30
Ip
20

Ip(x) 10

Ifault(x) 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

x = distance of fault from neutral

The SR345 implementation of the restricted ground fault protection is a low impedance
current differential scheme. The 345 calculates the magnitude of the ground differential
current as a difference between the vectors of the computed residual current, and the
measured ground current (i.e. 3I0- Ig), and applies a restraining current defined as the

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

maximum measured line current (Imax) to produce a percent slope value. The slope setting
allows the user to determine the sensitivity of the element based on the class and quality
of the CTs used.
The figure below shows the typical wiring between the winding CTs and the 345 CT
terminals to assure the correct performance of the protection. The restricted earth fault
protection is also available for delta windings with in-zone grounding transformer, or for
Delta corner grounded windings.

Transformer Winding
IA

IB

IC

Rg

IG Ig

E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12

Ia Ib Ic Ig Ia Ib Ic Ig

Winding 1 Current Inputs - CT (W1) Winding 2 Current Inputs - CT (W2)

The 345 RGF protection includes ground current supervision mechanism o provide more
security during external non-ground faults associated with CT saturation, that may result
into spurious neutral current, and may jeopardize the security of the RGF protection. When
the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is selected as “Enabled”, the algorithm checks if
the ground current measured by the relay satisfies the selected GND CURRENT
SUPERVISION LEVEL, before making operation decision. The ground current supervision is
not active if the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION is selected as “Disabled”. The RGF protection
works without the supervision as well.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > RESTRICTED GROUND
FAULT 1(2)
RGF FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” (and #2 “R2 TRIP”) will operate only when the Trip setting is
selected, and the Restricted Ground Fault protection is operational.
CT INPUTS
Range: CT (W1), CT(W2)
Default:CT (W1)
This setting defines the winding three-phase and ground currents used by the RGF
function.
RGF PICKUP
Range: 0.02 to 20 x CT (W1) in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CT (W1)
This setting defines the minimum pickup level of the ground differential current required
for operation. The pickup value is expressed in times phase CT primary rating.

6–48 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

RGF SLOPE
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 0%
This setting defines the slope as the ratio between the ground differential current and
the maximum line current (ground restraining current) in percentages. The RGF element
will operate if the actual ground differential/restraint ratio is greater than the slope and
the ground differential current is greater than the RGF pickup setting. See the RGF Logic
diagram.
RGF DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 S in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.30 s
The RGF pickup time delay setting defines the time required for the RGF element to
operate after it has picked up. This time delay will override the spurious ground
differential current condition caused by CT saturation due to external non-ground faults,
or during transformer energization. Since RGF protection is intended to detect small
ground fault currents, delayed clearance of such a fault is not a high concern. On the
other hand delayed RGF operation due to a spurious ground differential current caused
by an out-of-zone fault can be used as a backup for downstream protections should
they fail to clear the fault.
GND CURRENT SPVSN
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables or disables the ground current supervision of the RGF function. If set
to “Disabled”, the RGF function will work without ground current supervision. The ground
current level is monitored if the setting is set to “Enabled”.
GND SUPV LEVEL
Range: 0.02 to 10.00 x CTg (W1) in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CTg (W1)
This setting defines the level of measured ground current above which operation of the
RGF protection is allowed. The setting is presented in times ground CT primary. The
measured ground current is compared to the setting only if the GND CURRENT
SUPERVISION setting is set to “Enabled”.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

Example:Transformer: 5MVA, 13.8kV/4.16kV, D/Yg1 type

Rg = 10 ohms
Phase CTs: 800:5
Ground CT: 300:5
Ifgnd (max) = 4.16kV/(10 ohms *√3) = 240A - maximum ground fault current
To detect a ground fault on the Wye winding at 15% distance from the neutral point, the
relay shall detect ground differential current of:
Igd = (15x240)/100 = 36 A/800 = 0.045 x CT – PKP setting for the RGF protection
The transformer loading will be almost unaffected for ground faults close to the winding
neutral, so that the winding rated load can be used as a reference in defining the RGF slope
setting. The rated load for 4.16kV Wye winding is:
Irated = 5MVA/(4.16kV*√3) = 693 A

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Slope setting, % = (36 A/693A)*100 = 5.1 %. Select 5% if the transformer is expected to run
most of the time at full load. If most of the time the transformer runs at lower than the
nominal loads, the slope setting can be set to higher value:
@ 70% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 485 A)*100 = 7%
@ 50% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 346 A)*100 = 10% \
@ 30% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 208 A)*100 = 17%
The ground current supervision feature and/or the RGF pickup time delay can be used if CT
saturation due to heavy external faults, is a concern.

6–50 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH
SETPOINT
R
RGF FUNCTION:
OR

Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Alarm

OR
LED: TRIP
Trip

Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP)

AND

SETPOINT
BLOCK 1: Operate Output Relay 2 (W2 BKR TRIP)
Off = 0
TRIP (To Breaker Failure)
SETPOINT
BLOCK 2:

AND
Off = 0 RGF PICKUP:

OR
BLOCK 3:
RGF SLOPE:
Off = 0
RUN
SETPOINT

Winding Phase Currents RGF PKP TIME DELAY:

W1(2) Phase A current (Ia) SETPOINT
tPKP
W1(2) Phase B current (Ib) Imax = max (Ia,Ib,Ic) 0
OUTPUT RELAY X
AND

W1(2) Phase C current (Ic)

Do Not Operate, Operate

In = 3I0
Figure 6-24: Restricted Ground Fault Protection logic diagram

Igd = I 3I0 + Ig I
LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder
RGF OP

SETPOINT
OR

GND CURRENT SUPV:

Winding Ground Current
Disabled = 0, Enabled = 1 897806A1.cdr
W1(2) Ground current (Ig) Message and Event Recorder:
RGF PKP
GND CURNT SPV LEVEL
AND

Ig > LEVEL (x CT1)

6–51
S3 PROTECTION
 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Thermal Overload (49)

The thermal overload protection can be applied to prevent damage to the protected
cables, dry transformers, capacitor banks, or even overhead lines. Loads exceeding the
load ratings of the protected equipment can, over time, degrade the insulation, and may in
return lead to short circuit conditions. As the heating of plant equipment such as cables or
transformers is resistive (I2R), the generated heat is directly proportional to the square of
the flowing current (I2). The relay uses a thermal time characteristic based on current
squared and integrated over time.
The relay will continuously calculate the thermal capacity as a percentage of the total
thermal capacity. The thermal capacity is calculated as follows:
Eq. 12

Where:
θ(t) = Thermal capacity (%) at time t
θ(t-1) = Thermal capacity (%) at time t-1
Δt/τ = Time step Δt divided by the heating/cooling time constant τ
Iphase/Ipickup = Ratio between the actual load current and the pickup setting
τ = Heating and cooling time constant, usually provided by the manufacturer.
The heating time constant is used when the squared load/pickup ratio is greater than the
thermal capacity θ(t-1) estimated in the previous time step. Otherwise the formula uses
the cooling time constant.
The time to trip is estimated when the load current exceeds the PKP setting, and the 49
element picks up. At the same time, the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate
depending on the current amplitude and the prior loading condition of the cable. When the
thermal capacity exceeds the alarm level, the element will generate an alarm signal. The
thermal model alarm can be used as a warning for the start of dangerous overload
conditions, and can prevent unnecessary tripping. When the thermal capacity exceeds the
trip level, the element will generate a trip signal. As per the formula below, the operate time
(time to trip) is determined from when the element picks up until it trips, and depends on
both the measured load over time, and the equipment heating and cooling time constants.
The time to operate is defined by IEC60255-149 standard and based on the initial
equipment state is expressed by the following formulas:
Hot Curve
The time to operate is calculated by the formula below. The formula includes the initial
non-zero thermal capacity of the equipment corresponding to a certain load.
Eq. 13

Where:
TTRIP = Time to trip in seconds
θ0 = Initial thermal capacity
θ = 1 = Thermal capacitystate set to 100%
τ = Heating and cooling time constant, usually provided by the manufacturer.
Iphase/Ipickup = Ratio of the actual phase current and the pickup setting.
Cold Curve

6–52 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

The time to operate calculated by the formula, starts from thermal level with no load
before overload occurs, meaning the equipment temperature is considered as the ambient
temperature and its thermal level is considered equal to zero.
Eq. 14

The time to trip will start timing out once the level of the computed thermal capacity (%)
becomes higher than 100% thermal capacity (θ =1 ). The trip flag will dropout when the
Thermal capacity falls below 97% of the pickup level.
Calculating the PICKUP setting
In some applications, it is required to apply overload factor (K-factor) to achieve the
thermal rating of the protected equipment. In such cases the pickup level need to be
calculated based on the K-factor and the base current (rated equipment current). The time
to trip is then estimated when the ratio of actual current above the programmed pickup
current is higher than 1. The pickup is calculated as follows:
Eq. 15

Where:
K = overload factor (usually provided by the equipment manufacturer)
Ibase = base current (rated current of the equipment)
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > THERMAL OVLD
THERMAL OVLD FUNC
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
The output relays #1 “TRIP W1 BKR” and #2 “TRIP W2 BKR” will operate only if the Trip
function is selected, and the accumulated thermal capacity for any of the phases is over
100%. The “ALARM” LED will turn on if the thermal capacity for any phase is over the
THERMAL OVLD ALARM setting, regardless of whether Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip is
selected as the function. The “ALARM” LED will turn off when the thermal capacity value
of all phases is below 97% of the THERMAL OVLD ALARM setting. If Latched Alarm is
selected as the function, the “ALARM” LED will flash when the thermal capacity on any
phase is over the THERMAL OVLD ALARM setting, and will stay on even after the thermal
capacity for all phases drops below 97% of the THERMAL OVLD ALARM setting. The LED
can be reset upon initiation of the "Reset" command.
THERMAL OVLD PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the level of phase current above which the thermal model starts timing
out the time-to-trip per the logarithmic formula above.
THERMAL OVLD ALARM
Range: 70.0 to 110.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 80.0%
This setting sets the alarm level for the accumulated thermal capacity above which the
element generates an alarm.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

HEAT TIME CONSTANT (τH)

Range: 3.0 to 600.0 min in steps of 0.1 min
Default: 6.0 min
This time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity
at each time-step is greater than the one computed in the previous time-step.
COOL TIME CONSTANT (τC)
Range: 1.00 to 6.00 x τH in steps of 0.01 x τH
Default: 2.00 x τH
This time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity
at each time-step is less than the one computed in the previous time-step.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.
The thermal capacity is displayed on the relay even if the Thermal Overload Function is
NOTE:

set to “Disabled”.
NOTE

6–54 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Command
RESET

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LED: ALARM
S
AND LATCH
SETPOINT
R
FUNCTION
OR

Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm
Alarm

OR
LED: TRIP
Trip

Operate #1 Trip
(TRIP W1 BKR)
AND

Message
Ph A Thermal Alarm Operate #2 Trip

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

(TRIP W2 BKR)
Ph B Thermal Alarm
Ph C Thermal Alarm TRIP
SETPOINT
(To Breaker Failure)
ALARM

Transient Recorder
OR

θ > θ ALARM
SETPOINTS

PICKUP Event Recorder

SETPOINT
HEATING T. CONSTANT
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0 COOLING T. CONSTANT
BLOCK 2: RUN

AND
Off = 0

OR
BLOCK 3:
TTRIP (ph A)
THERMAL SETPOINT
Figure 6-25: Thermal Overload protection logic diagram

Off = 0
OVERLOAD
TTRIP (ph B) OUTPUT RELAY X
OR

Do Not Operate, Operate

TTRIP (ph C)

Message
Ph A Thermal OP

Ph B Thermal OP Event Recorder

Phase Currents Ph C Thermal OP

Transient Recorder
Phase A current (IA)
Phase B current (IB)
Phase C current (IC)
ACTUAL VALUES
Thermal Capacity ph A, %
Thermal Capacity ph B, %
Thermal Capacity ph C, % 897815A1.cdr

6–55
S3 PROTECTION
 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Time overcurrent curves

The 345 relay has two setpoint groups. When ordering the relay the user can select each
group to have two phase time overcurrent 51P(2), two ground time overcurrent 51G(2), two
neutral time overcurrent 51N(2), and two negative sequence time overcurrent 51_2(2)
elements. The programming of these elements is identical: PKP, Inverse Curve selection,
and Time Dial Multiplier (TDM). The curve shape can be either a standard curve selected
from a range of standard ANSI, IEC, IAC curves, Definite time, or a user-defined shape
programmed with the FlexCurve™ feature.
Accurate coordination may require changing the time overcurrent characteristics of
particular elements under different conditions. For picking up a cold load, a different time-
current characteristic can be produced by increasing the pickup current value. The
following setpoints are used to program the time-current characteristics.
If the injected current is more than 20 x PKP, the trip time will be the same as 20 x PKP.
NOTE:

NOTE • <Element_Name> PICKUP: The pickup current is the threshold current at which the
time overcurrent element starts timing. There is no intentional ‘dead band’ when the
current is above the pickup level. However, accuracy is only guaranteed above a 1.5
per unit pickup level. The dropout threshold is 98% of the pickup threshold. Enter the
pickup current corresponding to 1 per unit on the time overcurrent curves as a
multiple of the source CT. For example, if 100: 5 CTs are used and a pickup of 90 amps
is required for the time overcurrent element, enter “0.9 x CT”.
• <Element_Name> CURVE: Select the desired curve shape. If none of the standard
curve shapes is appropriate, a custom FlexCurve™ can be created by entering the trip
times at 80 different current values; see S2 SYSTEM SETUP > FLEXCURVE A. Curve
formulas are given for use with computer based coordination programs. Calculated
trip time values are only valid for I / Ipu > 1. Select the appropriate curve shape and
multiplier, thus matching the appropriate curve with the protection requirements. The
available curves are shown in the table below.

ANSI GE TYPE IAC IEC OTHER

Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Curve A (BS142) Definite Time
Very Inverse Very Inverse Curve B (BS142) Flexcurve ATM
Normally Inverse Inverse Curve C (BS142) Flexcurve BTM
Moderately Inverse Short Inverse IEC Short Inverse

• <Element_Name> MULTIPLIER: A multiplier setpoint allows shifting of the selected

base curve in the vertical time direction. Unlike the electromechanical time dial
equivalent, trip times are directly proportional to the value of the time multiplier
setpoint. For example, all trip times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values.
When Timed Over-Current is programmed with Definite time, the operating time is
obtained after multiplication of the selected Multiplier (TDM) by a 0.1 s base line. For
example, selection of TDM = 5 would lead to a 0.5 s operating time.
• <Element_Name> RESET: Time overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with
an internal ‘energy capacity’ memory variable. When this variable indicates that the
energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less than
100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold
of 97 to 99% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this
resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear. The Instantaneous
selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static units,
which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with

6–56 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

electromechanical units. With this setpoint, the energy capacity variable is

decremented according to the following equation.

where: TRESET = reset time in seconds; E = energy capacity reached (per unit); M = curve
multiplier; CR = characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, and FlexCurves™; 8
for IEC curves)
ANSI Curves
The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI
C37.90 curve classifications for extremely, very, normally, and moderately inverse. The
ANSI curves are derived from the following formula:

Eq. 16
where:T = trip time (seconds); M = multiplier value; I = input current; Ipu = pickup current
setpoint; A, B, C, D, E = constants
Table 6-5: ANSI Curve Constants
ANSI Curve Shape A B C D E
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5000 3.0094 0.7222
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.3400 –0.2840 4.0505
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3000 –4.1899 9.1272
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8000 –0.0800 0.1271

Table 6-6: ANSI Curve Trip Times (in seconds)

Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI Extremely Inverse
0.5 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.0 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.0 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.0 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.0 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.0 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.0 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI Very Inverse
0.5 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
1.0 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.0 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.0 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.0 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.0 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.0 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI Normally Inverse
0.5 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.0 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.0 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.0 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.0 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
8.0 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.0 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.5 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.0 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.0 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.0 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.0 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.0 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.0 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465

IEC Curves
For European applications, the relay offers the four standard curves defined in IEC 255-4
and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, and
Short Inverse. The formulae for these curves are:

Eq. 17
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current
setpoint, K, E = constants.
Table 6-7: IEC (BS) Inverse Time Curve Constants
IEC (BS) Curve Shape K E
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040

Table 6-8: IEC Curve Trip Times (in seconds)

Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200

6–58 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup)

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Short Time
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

IAC Curves
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:

Eq. 18
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current
setpoint, A to E = constants.
Table 6-9: GE Type IAC Inverse Curve Constants
IAC Curve Shape A B C D E
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221

Table 6-10: IAC Curve Trip Times

Multiplier (TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Multiplier (TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC Short Inverse
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

Phase timed overcurrent (51P)

The relay has two Phase Time Overcurrent elements per protection group. The settings of
this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce phase overcurrent trip or
pickup. There is no intentional “dead band” where the current is above the pickup level.
However the pickup accuracy is guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 3%
above the set PKP value. The TOC pickup flag is asserted when the current on any phase is
above the PKP value. The TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the
time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element
drops from pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the
pickup value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the
time for TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The selection of Definite Time
has a base time delay of 0.1 s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example the
operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5 s
applying the time delay accuracy outlined under the Technical Specification, and adding
approximately 8 to 10 ms output relay time.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE TOC 1(2)
PH TOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
The output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” (and #2 “R2 TRIP”) will operate when the Trip setting is
selected, and the Phase TOC operates.

6–60 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

PHASE CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Phase Timed Overcurrent menu provides the selection of either CT(W1) input
currents or CT(W2) currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the PH TOC element will use the ratings
of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If
the CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use the CT ratings associated with
transformer Winding 2.
PH TOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level, specified as times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
PH TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite Time, IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Default: Extremely Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected inverse curve.
PHASE TOC1(2) TDM
Range: 0.50 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected
with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the operation
of the element will not occur before an elapsed time after pickup, of 2.59 seconds.
PH TOC 1(2) RESET
Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as
most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls
below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Timed
Overcurrent element. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon
Phase TOC operation.
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–62
S3 PROTECTION

Command
RESET

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LED: ALARM
S

AND
LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
AND
PH TOC FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm SETPOINTS
Alarm LED: TRIP (configurable only if “TRIP”

OR
Trip function selected)
Operate trip RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND

upon selection RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR

SETPOINTS
To Breaker Failure
PH TOC INPUT:
Trip

PH TOC PICKUP:
Message and Event Recorder
PH TOC CURVE:
SETPOINTS PH TOC PH A OP
PH TOC TDM:
BLOCK 1: PH TOC PH B OP
Off = 0 PH TOC RESET TIME: PH TOC PH C OP
BLOCK 2: RUN IA > PICKUP PH TOC OP

AND
Off = 0

OR
SETPOINTS:
BLOCK 3:
OUTPUT RELAY X
OR

Off = 0
Do Not Operate, Operate
Figure 6-26: Phase time overcurrent protection logic diagram

RUN IB > PICKUP

LED: PICKUP
OR

CT(W1) CT(W2) phase

currents selected under RUN IC > PICKUP
PH TOC INPUT setpoint

Phase A current (IA)

Phase B current (IB)
Message and Event Recorder
Phase C current (IC)
PH TOC PKP
PH TOC PH A PKP

PH TOC PH B PKP 897808A1.cdr

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

PH TOC PH C PKP
 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50P)

The 345 relay has two identical instantaneous overcurrent protections - Phase IOC1, and
Phase IOC2 per protection group. Each of them consists of three separate instantaneous
overcurrent relays; one per phase, with identical settings. .
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 PHASE IOC1(2)
PH IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
PH CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides a selection for either CT(W1) input
currents or CT(W2) currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the PH IOC element will use the ratings
of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If
the CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use the CT ratings associated with
transformer Winding 2.
PH IOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the instantaneous overcurrent pickup level. For example, a PKP setting
of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
PH IOC1(2) DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides selection for the time delay used to delay the protection operation.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Instantaneous
Overcurrent element. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon
Phase IOC operation.
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.
Figure 6-27: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–64
S3 PROTECTION

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S

AND
LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
PH IOC FUNCTION:

AND
Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm
Alarm SETPOINTS

OR
LED: TRIP
Trip (configurable only if “TRIP”
function selected)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operate trip RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND

upon selection RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR

SETPOINT
SETPOINT To Breaker Failure
PH IOC INPUT: Trip
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0 PH IOC PICKUP:
BLOCK 2: RUN

AND
Off = 0

OR
IA > PICKUP
BLOCK 3: SETPOINT
Off = 0 PH IOC PKP DELAY:

tPKP
RUN 0
SETPOINT
tPKP
OUTPUT RELAY X
OR

IB > PICKUP
0
Do Not Operate, Operate
tPKP
0 Message and Event Recorder
CT(W1), CT(W2) phase RUN
PHASE IOC OP
currents selected under
PH TOC INPUT setpoint IC > PICKUP PH IOC A OP
Phase A current (IA) PH IOC B OP
Phase B current (IB)
PH IOC C OP
Phase C current (IC)

LED: PICKUP
OR

Message and Event Recorder 897809A1.cdr

PHASE IOC PKP

PH IOC A PKP
PH IOC B PKP
PH IOC C PKP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Ground timed overcurrent (51G/SG)

The relay has two Ground Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
the function are applied to the measured winding ground input current to produce pickup
and trip flags. The Ground TOC pickup flag is asserted, when the ground current is above
the PKP value. The Ground TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the
time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element
drops from pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the
pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the
time for Ground TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The Definite Time
selection has a default time of 0.1s.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND TOC
The settings from the menu for Sensitive Ground TOC, will appear only when the relay is
NOTE:

ordered with the sensitive ground CT. Otherwise, the relay displays the menu for Ground
NOTE TOC protection.

GND TOC1(2) FUNCTION

Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
If the Trip setting is selected, the TOC menu allows the user to select the operation of
either RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or both trip output relays.
GND CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Ground Timed Over-Current menu provides for the selection for either ground CT of
winding 1 - CT(W1), or ground CT of winding 2 - CT(W2), input. If CT(W1) is selected, the
GND TOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the relay under
SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use the
ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2.
GND TOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS.GND TOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setting sets the Time Overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. If the relay is
ordered with a Sensitive Ground CT, the range for this setting is 0.005 to 3.000 x CT, with
a step of 0.001xCT, and a default value of 1.000 x CT.
GND TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse IAC
Default: Extremely Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

GND TOC1(2) TDM

Range: 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection of the Time Dial Multiplier, using which the times from
the inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times greater than the PKP level, the
operation of the element will not occur before 2.59s has elapsed from the time of pickup.
GND TOC1(2) RESET
Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
This setting provides for the selection of either an Instantaneous or a Linear reset time. If
Instantaneous reset is selected, the ground TOC element will reset instantaneously
providing the current drops below 97-98% below the Ground TOC PKP level, before the
time for operation is reached. When Linear reset is selected, the time to reset is
calculated based on the following linear equation:

Eq. 19

where:
TRESET - reset time in seconds;
E - energy capacity reached (per unit);
M - curve multiplier;
CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, and FlexCurvesTM; 8 for IEC
curves).
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
only available if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground TOC element.
Either one, or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Ground TOC
operation.
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

6–66 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
GND TOC FUNCTION
AND

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Disabled = 0
Alarm
SETPOINTS
Latched Alarm ( configurable only if “TRIP”

OR
LED: TRIP
Trip function selected )
Operate trip RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND

upon selection RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR

SETPOINTS

GND TOC INPUT :

GND TOC PICKUP :

To Breaker Failure
Trip
GND TOC CURVE :

SETPOINTS
GND TOC TD MULTIPLIER :
BLOCK 1
Off = 0 GND TOC RESET :

BLOCK 2 RUN Ig > PICKUP

AND
SETPOINTS
Off = 0

OR
BLOCK 3 OUTPUT RELAY X

Off = 0 Do Not Operate, Operate

CT(W1) CT(W2) ground Message and Event Recorder

current selected under GND TOC OP
GND TOC INPUT

Ground/Sens Ground current (Ig) LED: PICKUP

897810A1.cdr
Message and Event Recorder
GND TOC PKP
Figure 6-28: Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

6–67
S3 PROTECTION
 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G/SG)

The relay has two Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protections per
setpoint group. The settings of these functions are applied to the measured ground, or
sensitive ground current for producing pickup and trip flags. The Ground IOC pickup flag is
asserted when the ground current is above the PKP value. The Ground IOC operate flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Ground IOC PKP Delay
setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup and operate flags will be
asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup without operation if the ground
current drops below 97 to 99% of the pickup value.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND IOC1(2)
GND IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
If the Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of
either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or both.
GND CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides for selection of either the ground
CT of Winding 1-CT(W1), or the ground CT of Winding 2- CT(W2) input. If CT(W1) is
selected, the GND IOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the
relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay
will use the ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2.
GND IOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS.GND IOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setting sets the ground overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. For example,
a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. For Sens.
Ground CT, the range of the setting is from 0.005 to 3.000 x CT, with a step of 0.001 x CT,
and a default value of 1.000 x CT.
GND IOC1(2) DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides the selection of the pickup time delay used to delay operation of
the protection.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground IOC element.
One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate under the operating condition.

6–68 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–70
S3 PROTECTION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

diagram

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
AND

GND IOC FUNCTION

Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm
SETPOINTS
Alarm LED: TRIP ( configurable only if “TRIP”

OR
function selected )
Trip
Operate trip RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND

upon selection RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR

To Breaker Failure
Trip
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
GND IOC CT INPUT
BLOCK 1
Off = 0 GND IOC PICKUP SETPOINT
BLOCK 2 RUN GND IOC PKP DELAY

AND
Off = 0 SETPOINTS

OR
tPKP
BLOCK 3 Ig > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY X
0

Off = 0 Do Not Operate, Operate

LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder

CT(W1), CT(W2) ground
current selected under GND TOC OP
GND TOC CT INPUT Message and Event Recorder
897811A1.cdr
Ground/Sens. Ground current (Ig) GND TOC PKP
Figure 6-29: Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Neutral timed overcurrent (51N)

The relay has two Neutral Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.
The Neutral TOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value.
The Neutral TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by
the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from
pickup without operating if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value,
before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for
Neutral TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 NEUTRAL TOC1(2)
NTRL TOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
If the Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of
either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or both.
NTRL CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The menu of the Neutral Time OverCurrent element provides for selection of either CT
(W1), or CT(W2) input currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the NTRL TOC element will use the
neutral current computed by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the
Winding 1 CT ratings. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the NTRL TOC element will use the
computed neutral current from Winding 2 phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings.
NTRL TOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT(W1) with CT(W1) rating of 300:5 translates into 270A primary
current.
NTRL TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Default: Extremely Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.
NTRL TOC1(2) TDM
Range: 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides for selection of the Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
selected inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level,
operation of the element will not occur before 2.59s have elapsed from pickup.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

NTRL TOC1(2) RESET

Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as
most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls
below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral Timed
Overcurrent element. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon
Neutral TOC operation.
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

6–72 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
NTRL TOC FUNCTION
AND

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Disabled = 0
Alarm
SETPOINTS
Latched Alarm LED: TRIP (configurable only if “TRIP”

OR
Trip function selected)
Operate trip RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND

upon selection RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR

SETPOINTS

NTRL TOC CT INPUT

NTRL TOC PICKUP

To Breaker Failure
Trip
NTRL TOC CURVE

SETPOINTS
NTRL TOC TDM
BLOCK 1
Off = 0 NTRL TOC RESET

BLOCK 2 AND RUN IN > PICKUP

Off = 0 SETPOINTS:

OR
BLOCK 3 OUTPUT RELAY X

Off = 0 Do Not Operate, Operate

Figure 6-30: Neutral Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

Message and Event Recorder

CT(W2), CT(W2)
neutral current NTRL TOC OP
computed by the relay
Neutral current (IN) LED: PICKUP

Message and Event Recorder

897812A1.cdr
NTRL TOC PKP

6–73
S3 PROTECTION
 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)

The relay has two Instantaneous Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.
The Neutral IOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value.
The Neutral IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined
by the Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup
and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup
without operation if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 (2) > S3 NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
NTRL IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
If the Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of
either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or both.
NTRL CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Neutral Overcurrent menu provides selection for either CT (W1), or CT(W2) phase
inputs. If CT(W1) is selected, the NTRL IOC element will use the neutral current computed
by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the Winding 1 CT ratings. If CT(W2)
setting is selected, the relay will use the computed neutral current based on Winding 2
phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings.
NTRL IOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT.
NTRL IOC1(2) DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides for selection of the pickup time delay used to delay the operation of
the protection.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral IOC element.
One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Neutral IOC operation.
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.

6–74 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET
BLOCK 1/2/3

LED: ALARM
S

AND
LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
NTRL IOC FUNCTION
AND

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm
SETPOINTS
Alarm LED: TRIP (configurable only if “TRIP”

OR
Trip function selected)
Operate trip RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND
For details see Common setpoints.

upon selection RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR

To Breaker Failure
Trip
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
NTRL IOC CT INPUT
BLOCK 1
Off = 0 NTRL IOC PICKUP SETPOINTS

BLOCK 2 RUN NTRL IOC PKP DELAY

AND
SETPOINTS
Off = 0

OR
tPKP
OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK 3 IN > PICKUP 0
Off = 0 Do Not Operate, Operate

Message and Event Recorder

CT(W2), CT(W2)
neutral current Neutral IOC PKP
computed by the relay
Figure 6-31: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

Neutral current (IN) LED: PICKUP

Message and Event Recorder

897813A1.cdr
NTRL TOC PKP

6–75
S3 PROTECTION
 S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Negative sequence timed overcurrent (51_2)

The SR3 relay has two Negative Sequence Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The
negative sequence overcurrent protection responds to negative sequence |I2|current,
where it is calculated as .

The negative sequence overcurrent elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase
faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. While negative sequence elements do not
respond to a balanced load, they do detect the negative sequence current present in an
unbalanced load. For this reason, select an element pickup setting above the maximum
expected I2 current due to load unbalance.
The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm) Pickup flag is asserted when the negative
sequence current is above the PKP value. The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm)
operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the selected
inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from pickup without
operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value, before the time
for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for Negative Sequence
TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The selection of Definite Time has a base
time delay of 0.1s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example, the operating time
for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ TOC1(2)
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) FUNC
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
If the Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation
ofeither one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or
both.
PHASE CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Negative Sequence TOC menu provides selection for either CT(W1) input currents or
CT(W2) currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the NEG SEQ TOC element will use CT ratings
associated with transformer winding 1. If the CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use
the CT ratings associated with transformer winding 2.
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting defines the negative sequence TOC pickup level associated with the ratings
of the CTs selected under NEG SEQ CT INPUT.
For example if CT(W1) = 100:5, and the CT(W2)=500:5, a pickup of 0.5 xCT with NEG SEQ
CT INPUT = CT(W1) will be equivalent to a pickup of 0.5x100 = 50Amps negative
sequence current. The same pickup setting with NEG SEQ CT INPUT selected as CT(W2)
will lead to a pickup threshold of 250 Amps neg. sequence current
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: - ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse- Definite Time- IEC Curve A/
B/C and Short Inverse- IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Default: Ext Inverse
This setting defines the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.

6–76 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

NEG SEQ TOC1(2) TDM

Range: 0.05 to 50.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier, which modifies the time
response of the selected curve. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the
operation of the element will not occur before the elapse of 2.59 seconds from pickup.
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) RESET
Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
The reset of the negative sequence timed overcurrent can be selected as either
“Instantaneous” or “Linear”. If Instantaneous reset is selected, the Negative Sequence
TOC element will reset instantaneously providing that the current drops below 97-98%
of the Neg. Seq. TOC PKP level, before the time for operation is reached. When Linear
reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation:

Eq. 20

where: TRESET - reset time in seconds; E - energy capacity reached (per unit); M - curve
multiplier; CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, and FlexCurvesTM; 8
for IEC curves).
The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP, TDM
and points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values currents is
monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of 100% of
the set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-98% of this
level, the element will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an
input for computation of the reset time, when the “Linear” reset is selected as a setting.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Negative Sequence TOC
element. One, or both, trip output relays can be selected to operate under the Negative
Sequence TOC operating condition.
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
NOTE:

menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either
NOTE Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/Do Not
Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is
selected as Trip.

OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–78
S3 PROTECTION

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH

R
OR

SETPOINT
AND

NEG SEQ TOC FUNCTN:

Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm SETPOINTS
Alarm (configurable only if “TRIP”

OR
LED: TRIP
function selected)
Trip
Operate trip RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
output relays
AND

upon selection RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR

SETPOINTS

NEG SEQ TOC PICKUP To Breaker Failure

Trip
NEG SEQ TOC CURVE

SETPOINTS NEG SEQ TOC TDM

BLOCK 1:
NEG SEQ TOC RESET
Off = 0
RUN I_2 > PICKUP

AND
BLOCK 2: SETPOINTS
Off = 0

OR
I_2 x t = OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK 3:
Do Not Operate, Operate
Off = 0 Adjust PKP
Figure 6-32: Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent logic diagram

Message and Event Recorder

Calculated Negative NEG SEQ TOC OP
Sequence Current LED: PICKUP

I_2 Message and Event Recorder 897807A1.cdr

NEG SEQ TOC PKP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION

Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent (50_2)

The 345 relay has one Negative Sequence Overcurrent element per protection group. The
negative sequence over-current protection responds to negative sequence current, where
it is calculated as .

The negative sequence over-current elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase
faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. While negative sequence elements do not
respond to balanced load, they do detect the negative sequence current present in
unbalanced load. For this reason, select an element pickup setting above the maximum
expected current due to load unbalance.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ IOC
NEG SEQ IOC FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
NEG SEQ IOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting defines the negative sequence IOC pickup level.
NEG SEQ IOC DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting specifies the time delay before IOC operation. .
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1/2/3
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–80
S3 PROTECTION

Command

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RESET

LED: ALARM
S

AND
SETPOINT LATCH

R
NEG SEQ IOC FUNCTN:
OR

Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP

OR
Trip

Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

AND

To Breaker Failure
Trip

Message
NegSeq IOC

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1:
NEG SEQ IOC PICKUP: SETPOINT
Off = 0
RUN NEG SEQ IOC DELAY:

AND
BLOCK 2: SETPOINTS
Off = 0 tPKP

OR
I_2 > PICKUP 0 OUTPUT RELAY X
BLOCK 3:
Do Not Operate, Operate
Off = 0

Calculated Negative Event Recorder

Sequence Current

I_2 Transient Recorder

LED: PICKUP 898795A1.cdr

Event Recorder

Transient Recorder
Figure 6-33: Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent protection logic diagram
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

S4 Controls
Figure 6-34: Main controls menu

S4 CONTROLS
CHANGE SETP GROUP
VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
ٕ
W1 BREAKER FAIL
W2 BREAKER FAIL
RESET
LOCKOUT

897767A2. cdr

Change setpoint group

The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups- Group 1 and Group 2 for all protection
elements. Switching between these two groups is available automatically by assigning an
input (contact, virtual, remote, logic element), or via communications.
Group 1 is the default setpoint group. The relay can automatically switch from Group 1
protections to Group 2 protections, and vice versa, by setting up the switching conditions
under “Change Setpoint Group”. Under some application conditions, such as an
overcurrent element pick up, it may not be desirable to change setpoint groups. A setpoint
change can also be prevented if the breaker is open, so that a fault detected before a
reclosure will not cause a group change while the breaker is open. In such cases, the user
can set a condition under “BLK GROUP CHANGE”, where if asserted, the active setpoint
group will stay active, even if the input configured to switch to the other setpoint group is
asserted. For example if the active group was Group 1 at the time of a trip, the breaker
opens, and the input configured under “BLK GROUP CHANGE” is asserted, the relay will
maintain Setpoint Group 1, even if the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is asserted. Vice versa, if
the “BLK GROUP CHANGE” input is asserted; the relay will not switch from Group 2 to Group
1, even if the input under “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is de-asserted.
The relay will default to Setpoint Group 1, if both the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” and the
blocking input “BLK GROUP CHANGE” are de-asserted.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > CHANGE SPNT GROUP
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects an input used to change from Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 2,
when asserted. If no group change supervision is selected, Setpoint group 2 will stay
active as long as the “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” input is asserted, and will revert to Group 1,
when this input is de-asserted.
BLOCK GROUP CHANGE
For details see Common setpoints.
This setting defines an input that can be used to block changing setpoint groups. When
the assigned input is asserted, changing from one setpoint group to the other one is
blocked.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Figure 6-35: Switching setpoint groups - Logic diagram

LED: Setpoint Group 2

SETPOINT

AND
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
Use Setpoint Group 2

OR
Off

SETPOINT

AND
BLK GROUP CHANGE

Off

AND

ACTUAL VALUES
Group 1 Active

LED: Setpoint Group 1

Default to Setpoint Group 1

OR
AND

897791.cdr

Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS.
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROL > VIRTUAL
INPUTS menu. For this purpose, each of the virtual inputs selected for control need be
“Enabled” under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS, and its type “Self-
Reset” or “Latched” specified.
If Self-Reset type was selected, entering “On” command will lead to a pulse of one
protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger
source to a Logic Element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. If “Latched”
type is selected, the state of the virtual input will be latched, upon entering “On” command.
Refer to the logic diagram in the S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS section for more
details.

6–82 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

Logic elements
The 345 relay has 16 Logic Elements available to build simple logic using the state of any
programmed contact, virtual, or remote input, or from the output operand of a protection,
or control element. Changing the state of any of the assigned inputs used as trigger
sources, will change the state of the Logic Element, unless a blocking input is present. The
logic provides for assigning up to eight triggering inputs in a programmable gate for Logic
Element operation, and up to four blocking inputs in a programmable gate for defining the
block signal. Pickup and dropout timers are available for delaying Logic Element operation
and drop-out respectively. In addition, the user can define whether to use the “ON”, or
“OFF” state of the programmed element by selecting ASSERTED: “On” or “Off”.
Referring to the Logic Element logic diagram below, the Logic Element can be set to one of
four functions: Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip. When Alarm or Latched Alarm is
selected, the output relay #1 (Trip) is not triggered during Logic Element operation. The Trip
output relay will be triggered when Trip is selected as the function, and the Logic Element
operates. The Logic Element function can be also selected as Control, and used with other
relay elements without turning on the “ALARM” and “TRIP” LEDs.
The “PICKUP” LED will turn on upon a Logic Element pickup condition except when the
Logic Element function is selected as Control.
The “ALARM” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function
selected is either Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
The “TRIP” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function is
selected as Trip.
The option to trigger auxiliary output relays is provided for any of the selected Logic
Element functions.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > LOGIC ELEMENTS
LE1(16) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
LE1(16) ASSERTED
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
This setting defines the Logic Element state “On” or “Off” to be used as an output. The
asserted “On” selection provides an output “high” when the LE is "On". If asserted “Off” is
selected, then the LE output will be “high”, when the LE is “Off”.
TRIGGER INPUTS
Range: 2 to 8
Default: 3
This setting defines the number of trigger sources to be used in the menu of the Logic
Element. Up to eight trigger sources (inputs) can be selected.
TRIGGER SOURCE 1 (8)
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the trigger sources is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected
from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote input, or
an output flag from a protection, or control element. See the list of available inputs from
the table below.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

TRIGGER LOGIC
Range: OR, AND, NOR, NAND, XOR, XNOR
Default: OR
This setting defines the gate types for the trigger sources (inputs).
Note that the XOR functionality is as follows: XOR output is triggered only when ONLY ONE
NOTE:

of the inputs is triggered.

NOTE
PKP TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the pickup time delay before Logic Element operation.
DPO TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the time delay from a reset timer that starts upon expiry of the
pickup time delay and prolongs the operation of the Logic Element until this time
expires.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
NUMBER OF BLOCKS
Range: 2 to 4
Default: 3
This setting defines the number of blocks to be used in the menu of the Logic Element.
Up to four blocks can be selected.
BLOCK 1 (4)
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the blocks is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected from a
list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote input, or an
output flag from a protection, or control element, as well as an input from any of the
other seven logic inputs. See the list of available inputs from the table below
BLOCK LOGIC
Range: OR, AND, NOR, NAND, XOR, XNOR
Default: OR
This setting defines the gate type for the block inputs.
A Logic Element can be used to provide under-voltage supervision when overcurrent
conditions are detected. The logic from the Logic Element below, see figure: Example of
Block Logic setting from EnerVista, shows that overcurrent trip will not be initiated unless
the relay detects either auxiliary or phase under-voltage conditions. In any other cases,
with both under-voltage elements dropped out, Overcurrent trip will not be initiated.
Each Logic Element can include output from another logic element.
Example: Programing an overall breaker alarm using Logic Elements

6–84 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

Figure 6-36: Example of an overall breaker alarm from EnerVista

In this example, all eight trigger sources from Logic Element 1 are programmed into an
OR gate, with operands originating from breaker functions such as Breaker Status,
Breaker Health, Trip Counter, Breaker Coil Monitoring, and Breaker Failure. The Trigger
Logic setpoint is selectable to any boolean operator such as OR, AND, NAND, NOR, XOR,
or XNOR. All four block inputs are programmed with contact inputs 1 to 4, and the Block
logic setpoint is programmed into an OR gate. These inputs may include Maintenance
input, Breaker disconnected input, Protection disabled input, etc.
Output Relay # 3 is selected to energize upon operation of Logic Element 1, to denote a
Breaker Alarm. With pickup time delay set to 2000ms, Logic Element 1 (BKR Alarm)
operation will occur 2 seconds after the operation of any of the trigger sources when no
block is applied.
The same logic using Logic Element 2 can be built for Breaker #2.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–86
Command
S4 CONTROLS

RESET

LED: ALARM
S

AND
LATCH
SETPOINT R

LOGIC EL FUNCTION OR

Disabled= 0

AND
Latched Alarm
Alarm LED: TRIP

OR
Trip

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Control
Operate Output Relay1 ( TRIP)

SETPOINT AND

TRIGGER INPUTS
tPKP
SETPOINT
2 to 8
TRIGGER LOGIC
tPKP
TRIGGER SOURCE 1 SETPOINT

Off OUTPUT RELAY X

. Do Not Operate, Operate

. OR, AND, NOR,
NAND, XOR, XNOR
.
TRIGGER SOURCE 8 SETPOINT Event Recorder
Off
Figure 6-37: Logic Element logic diagram

PKP TIME DELAY Transient Recorder

SETPOINT

LE1 ASSERTED STATE

: RST TIME DELAY
t PKP Message
On tPKP
SETPOINT Logic Elem1 OP

AND
Off tRST
BLOCK INPUTS
tPKP
SETPOINT
2 to 4 Logic Elem1 DPO
BLOCK LOGIC
tPKP LED: PICKUP
BLOCK 1
Off
. Logic Elem1 PKP
. OR, AND, NOR,
NAND, XOR, XNOR 898755A2.cdr
.
BLOCK 4
Off
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

Operand types and descriptions

The following tables of Logic Operands, taken from Function Code FC134B in the 3 Series
Communications Guide, show the list of available Logic Inputs. Where specific event
descriptions are not given, a general description applies as follows:
General descriptions of operands originating from protection, control, and monitoring
elements:

"..operand name..Trip PKP" The function setpoint of the element has been programmed as "Trip" and the element picked up
"..operand name.. Trip OP" The function setpoint of the element has been programmed as "Trip" and the element operated
"..operand name.. Trip DPO" The function setpoint of the element has been programmed as "Trip" and the element operation
dropped out
"..operand name..Alarm PKP" The function setpoint of the element has been programmed as "Alarm" and the element picked up
"..operand name.. Alarm OP" The function setpoint of the element has been programmed as "Alarm" and the element operated
"..operand name.. Alarm DPO" The function setpoint of the element has been programmed as "Alarm" and the element operation
dropped out
"..operand name.. Block" The operation of the element has been blocked

General descriptions of operands originating from digital elements such as contact, virtual
and Remote inputs, Output Relays, and Virtual Outputs:

"..operand name.. Off "The status of the selected input or output is OFF
"..operand name.. On "The status of the selected input or output is ON

Element Operands Event Description

Contact Inputs Contact IN 1..10 On
Contact IN 1..10 Off
Virtual Inputs Virtual IN 1..32 On
Virtual IN 1..32 Off
Remote Inputs Remote IN 1..32 On
Remote IN 1..32 Off
General Off
On
Any Trip Generated upon operation of any element with function setpoint set to "Trip"
Any Alarm Generated upon operation of any element with function setpoint set to "Alarm"
Any Pkp OP Generated upon detection of pickup status from any element
Any Block Generated when the operation of any element is blocked
Output Relay 1 On
Output Relay 2 On
Output Relay 3 On
Output Relay 4 On
Output Relay 5 On
Output Relay 6 On
Output Relay 1 Blk
Output Relay 2 Blk
BKR Connected Defines the status of the breaker in the power system. BKR Connected means the
breaker is racked in the system
BKR2 Connected Defines the status of breaker 2 in the power system. BKR2 Connected means breaker
2 is racked in the system
Setpoint Group2 On Setpoint Group 2 is active
Open Breaker Defines a command to open the breaker

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Element Operands Event Description

Close Breaker Defines a command to close the breaker
Maint. Req.
52a Contact OP
52b Contact OP
BKR2 52a Cont OP
52b Contact OP
Reset OK Reset command has been executed
BKR Stat Open Breaker status open detected
BKR2 Stat Open Breaker 2 status open detected
BKR2 Stat Open DPO
BKR Stat Clsd Breaker status closed detected
BKR2 Stat Clsd Breaker 2 status closed detected
BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO
Setpoint Group1 On Setpoint Group 1 is active
Setpoint Group2 On Setpoint Group 2 is active
Group Change Blk Changing of Setpoint Groups is blocked
Trip BKR1 Blk
Trip BKR 1 OP
Trip BKR 2 OP
Trip BKR2 Blk
Trip BKR 1 DPO
Trip BKR 2 DPO
Synchrocheck Sync Operation Syncheck element operated
Sync Close OP Syncheck close breaker command has been generated to the breaker
Sync Condition Defines the presence of syncheck conditions.
Testing Testing ON Testing feature is Enabled
Testing OFF Testing feature is Disabled

Element Operands
2nd Harmonic Differential 2nd Hmnc Diff OP 2nd Hmnc Diff Ph B
2nd Hmnc Diff Ph A 2nd Hmnc Diff Ph C
5th Harmonic Differential 5th Hmnc Diff OP 5th Hmnc Diff Ph B
5th Hmnc Diff Ph A 5th Hmnc Diff Ph C
Ambient Temperature HI Amb Temp PKP LO Amb Temp PKP HI Amb Temp DPO
HI Amb Temp OP LO Amb Temp OP LO Amb Temp DPO
Breaker Failure BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP BKR2 Stat Fail OP BKR Stat Fail OP
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO
BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO BKR2 Fail Alrm OP
Demand Curr Dmd1 Alrm OP C Dmd2 PhA Alrm OP Curr Dmd1 Block
Curr Dmd2 Alrm OP C Dmd2 PhB Alrm OP Curr Dmd2 Block
C Dmd2 PhC Alrm OP
Ground Instantaneous Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO
Overcurrent
Gnd IOC1 Trip OP Gnd IOC2 Trip OP Gnd IOC1 Block
Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO
Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC2 Block
Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP

6–88 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

Element Operands
Ground Timed Overcurrent Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO
Gnd TOC1 Trip OP Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP Gnd TOC2 Block
Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP
Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP Gnd TOC1 Block Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO
Gnd TOC2 Trip OP Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP
Instantaneous Differential Inst Diff Trip PKP Inst Diff Alrm PKP Inst Diff Block
Inst Diff Trip OP Inst Diff Alrm OP
Inst Diff Trip DPO Inst Diff Alrm DPO
Lockout Lockout OP L/O Rst Closed OP
Lockout DPO Lockout Block
Logic Elements LE 1..16 Alarm DPO LE 1..16 PKP LE 1..16 DPO
LE 1..16 Alarm OP LE 1..16 Trip DPO LE 1..16 OP
LE 1..16 Alarm PKP LE 1..16 Trip OP LE 1..16 Trip PKP
Negative Sequence NSeq IOC Trp PKP NSeq IOC Alrm OP NSeq IOC 2 Trp OP
Instantaneous Overcurrent
NSeq IOC Trp OP NSeq IOC Alrm DPO NSeq IOC 2 Trp DPO
NSeq IOC Trp DPO NSeq IOC Block NSeq IOC 2 AlrmDPO
NSeq IOC Alrm PKP NSeq IOC 2 AlrmPKP NSeq IOC 2 Block
NSeq IOC 2 Trp PKP NSeq IOC 2 Alrm OP
Negative Sequence Timed NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP NSeq TOC2 Trip OP
Overcurrent
NSeq TOC1 Trip OP NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO
NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO NSeq TOC1 Blk NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO
NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC2 Blk
NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP
Neutral Instantaneous Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO
Overcurrent
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC2 Block
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP
Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC1 Block Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO
Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP
Neutral Timed Overcurrent Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP
Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO
Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC1 Block Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC2 Block
Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP
Percent Differential Pcnt Diff Trip PKP Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP Pcnt Diff Block
Pcnt Diff Trip OP Pcnt Diff Alrm OP
Pcnt Diff Trip DPO Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO
Ph Dif A Alarm PKP Ph Dif C Alarm PKP Ph Diff B Trip PKP
Ph Dif A Alarm OP Ph Dif C Alarm OP Ph Diff B Trip OP
Ph Dif A Alarm DPO Ph Dif C Alarm DPO Ph Diff B Trip DPO
Ph Dif B Alarm PKP Ph Diff A Trip PKP Ph Diff C Trip PKP
Ph Dif B Alarm OP Ph Diff A Trip OP Ph Diff C Trip OP
Ph Dif B Alarm DPO Ph Diff A Trip DPO Ph Diff C Trip DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Element Operands
Phase Instantaneous Ph IOC1 Trip PKP Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP Ph IOC2 Trip DPO
Overcurrent
Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph IOC1 Alarm OP Ph IOC1 Block
Ph IOC1 Trip DPO Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO
Ph IOC2 Trip PKP Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP Ph IOC2 Block
Ph IOC2 Trip OP Ph IOC2 Alarm OP
Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP
Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP Ph A IOC1 Trip OP
Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO
Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP
Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP Ph B IOC1 Trip OP
Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO
Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP
Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP Ph C IOC1 Trip OP
Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO
Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP
Ph A IOC2 Trip OP Ph B IOC2 Trip OP Ph C IOC2 Trip OP
Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO
Phase Timed Overcurrent Ph TOC1 Trip PKP Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP Ph TOC2 Alrm OP
Ph TOC1 Trip OP Ph TOC1 Alarm OP Ph TOC2 Alrm DPO
Ph TOC1 Trip DPO Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph TOC2 Trip OP
Ph TOC1 Block Ph TOC2 Block Ph TOC2 Trip DPO
Ph TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph TOC2 Trip PKP
Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP
Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP Ph A TOC1 Trip OP
Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO
Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP
Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP Ph B TOC1 Trip OP
Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO
Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP
Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP Ph C TOC1 Trip OP
Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO
Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP
Ph A TOC2Trip OP Ph B TOC2 Trip OP Ph C TOC2 Trip OP
Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO
Restricted Ground Fault RGF1 Trip PKP RGF2 Trip PKP RGF1 Alarm DPO
RGF1 Trip OP RGF2 Trip OP RGF1 Block
RGF1 Trip DPO RGF2 Trip DPO RGF2 Alarm DPO
RGF1 Alarm PKP RGF2 Alarm PKP RGF2 Block
RGF1 Alarm OP RGF2 Alarm OP
RTD RTD 1..12 Trip PKP RTDTrouble BLK Hot RTD PKP
RTD 1..12 Trip OP RTD Trouble Alr OP Hot RTD OP
RTD1..12 BLK RTD 1..12 Alarm PKP Hot RTD DPO
RTD 1..12 Alarm OP
Self-Test Error Self-Test Rly 7 On Self Test Alarm OP

6–90 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

Element Operands
Sensitive Ground Instantaneous SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO
Overcurrent
SGnd IOC1 Trip OP SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP SGnd IOC1 Block
SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO
SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC2 Block
SGnd IOC2 Trip OP SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP
Sensitive Ground Timed SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC2 Trip OP
Overcurrent
SGnd TOC1 Trip OP SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO
SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO
SGnd TOC1 Block SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC2 Block
SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP
Thermal Overload Therm O/L Trip OP Therm Lvl Alrm OP Therm O/L Block
Therm O/L Trip DPO Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
Therm PhA Alrm OP Therm PhC Alrm OP Therm PhB Trip OP
Therm PhA Alrm DPO Therm PhC Alrm DPO Therm PhB Trip DPO
Therm PhB Alrm OP Therm PhA Trip OP Therm PhC Trip OP
Therm PhB Alrm DPO Therm PhA Trip DPO Therm PhC Trip DPO
Trip Counter BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP W2BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP
Trip Coil Monitoring R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP R2 CoilMonAlrm OP R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Winding breaker failure

There are two Breaker Failure functions, one per winding breaker. The BF function monitors
the phase currents after a trip command from a protection element is initiated. If any
phase current is above the set current level after the BF DELAY timer/timers expire, a
Breaker Failure will be declared, and will operate the selected output relays. The Breaker
Failure scheme also provides the setup for BF initiate from the external input via Contact
Input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
The operation of the filter that reduces the overreaching effect of the assymetrical offset
currents will cause the measured current to ramp down to zero after the breaker trips. It is
strongly recommended that a margin of 1.5 power cycle time is added to the expected
breaker time-to-trip time for the BF DELAY1 and BF DELAY 2 timers.
W1 BREAKER FAIL logic is triggered only upon operation of a protection element with a
NOTE:

function set to Trip, and the CT INPUT associated with Winding 1 CT - i.e. CT(W1). Similarly,
NOTE the W2 BREAKER FAIL logic will be triggered only upon operation of a protection element
with the function set to Trip, and the CT INPUT set to CT(W2).
When the 345 relay allows the configuration of only one breaker failure function, this
function is always associated with the Winding 1 breaker, and will be triggered upon
operation of any protection element with a FUNCTION setting set to Trip, and the CT INPUT
set to CT(W1).

The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > W1(W2) BREAKER FAIL
BF FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
BF CURRENT
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting selects the current level to be monitored by the BF logic after the
programmed time delays.
BF EXT INITIATE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects the external initiate signal to launch the Breaker Failure function.
BF TIME DELAY 1
Range: 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.1 s
This timer starts when breaker trip command is issued from any of the protection
elements.
BF TIME DELAY 2
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This timer does not start before a trip condition is recognized, BF TIMER DELAY 1 has
expired, and at least one of the phase currents is above the BF CURRENT setpoint.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.

6–92 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH
SETPOINT
R
OR

BF FUNCTION

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm

OR
Alarm

Message and Event Recorder

W1(W2) Breaker Failure

Figure 6-38: Breaker Failure logic diagram

SETPOINT

Phase Currents BF CURRENT :

SETPOINT
Phase A current (Ia) Ia > PICKUP
BF TIME DELAY 2
Phase B current (Ib) Ib > PICKUP RUN
OR
SETPOINTS
AND

tPKP
Phase C current (Ic) Ic > PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY X

Do Not Operate, Operate

From Protection operation

Trip

SETPOINT

SETPOINT BF TIME DELAY 1 897814A1.CDR

RUN

OR
BF EXT INITIATE
tPKP
Off = 0

Range: Contact Input,

Virtual Input, Remote Input,
Logic Element

6–93
S4 CONTROLS
 S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Lockout (86)
The purpose of the Lockout function is to prevent unwanted closing of the breaker after
being tripped by the operation of a protection element. To use the Lockout feature from a
345 relay, first program a Logic Element using the "Lockout OP" operand. The Logic
Element shall be then set to drive an output relay with an NC contact connected in series
with an outside output relay normally used for closing the breaker. The full lockout
sequence is then the following: a protection operates, sends trip command to the breaker
and the breaker opens. The same protection is set to trigger Lockout. The programmed
Logic Element operates and drives an output relay with an NC contact connected in series
with a relay used for breaker closing. The NC contact opens and blocks the closing to the
breaker, until the lockout is reset.
The lockout block is removed upon a Lockout Reset signal sent to the relay. The Lockout
Reset can be initiated either by pressing the relay pushbutton RESET (after it is enabled to
perform Lockout resets), or by any contact, virtual, or remote input selected under the
Lockout Reset setpoint.
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
INPUT 1(10)
Range: Off, Any Logic Operand
Default: Off
This setting selects an operand from the list of logic operands. The assertion of the
selected operand triggers lockout. Ten trigger input setpoints are provided.
LOCKOUT SUPERVISION
Range: Off, Any logic operand
Default: Off
This setting provides selection of any logic operand to supervise the initiation of lockout
state. As an example the open status of the breaker/breakers could be used for lockout
supervision.
LOCKOUT RESET
Range: Off, Any Logic Operand
Default: Off
This setting provides selection of any logic operand from the list of operands for
resetting the breaker lockout condition.
RESET FROM PB RESET
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
If Enabled, pressing the front panel Reset pushbutton resets the Lockout. Otherwise,
when Disabled, pressing the Reset PB sends a common reset which does not reset the
Lockout.
BLOCK RESET LOCKOUT
Range: Off, Any Logic Operand
Default: Any Trip
This setting provides selection of any logic operand to block the reset action of the
lockout state. Usually if there is a presence of a trip condition, the reset command will
not be executed. The default value is selected as "Any Trip" operand.

6–94 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS

BLOCK 1(3)
For details see Common setpoints.
Upon assertion of the block selected operand, lockout will not be executed. When the
selected lockout blocking input drops out, and upon new trip, the trip and close output
relays will be locked out.
The lockout state can be applied to both output relays W1 BKR TRIP and W2 BKR TRIP used
NOTE:

for tripping the transformer breakers. If an attempt is made to close the breaker directly,
NOTE bypassing the relay outputs, (i.e. from the breaker control switch while the protective relay
applies lockout on its two TRIP outputs,) the breaker may not close, as the trip signal would
have priority over the close signal.

Figure 6-39: Lockout logic diagram

SETPOINT
LOCKOUT FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled

SETPOINT
INPUT 1
.
.
.
OR
SETPOINT
INPUT 10

LOGIC OPERAND
AND

S LOCKOUT OP
SETPOINT
NON-
LOCKOUT SUPVSN VOLATILE
On LATCH
R
SETPOINT Set Dominant LOGIC OPERAND
LOCKOUT DPO
BLOCK 1:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
OR

Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0

SETPOINT
PB “RESET”
RESET FROM PB RESET
Disabled = 0
Enabled
OR

LOGIC OPERAND
AND

SETPOINT LOCKOUT RESET

RESET LOCKOUT 898852A1.cdr

Off

SETPOINT
BLOCK RESET LOCKT

ANY TRIP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S5 Inputs/Outputs
Figure 6-40: Main inputs/outputs menu

S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
898768A2.cdr

Contact inputs
The 345 relay is equipped with ten (10) contact inputs, which can be used to provide a
variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control, external trips, blocking of protection
elements, etc. All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the 345 typical wiring
diagram) that require an external DC voltage source. The voltage threshold (17V, 33V, 84V,
166V) is selectable, and it applies for all ten contact inputs.
The contact inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to
prevent false operation from induced voltage. Because of de-bouncing, momentary
contacts must have a minimum dwell time greater than half power frequency cycle. The
debounce time is adjustable by the user.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
Range: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Default: 84 V
CONTACT INPUT 1
Range: 14 characters
Default: Bkr1 52a (CI#1)
CONTACT INPUT 2
Range: 14 characters
Default: Bkr1 52b (CI#2)
CONTACT INPUT 3
Range: 14 characters
Default: Bkr2 52a (CI#3)
CONTACT INPUT 4
Range: 14 characters
Default: Bkr2 52b (CI#4)
CONTACT INPUT X [5 to 10]
Range: 14 characters
Default: Input X
DEBOUNCE TIME
↘
CONTACT INPUT X [1 TO 10]
Range: 1 to 64 ms
Default: 2 ms
Each of the contact inputs 5 to 10, can be named to reflect the function it represents within
the application. Up to 14 alpha-numeric characters are available for names.

6–96 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

The debounce time is used to discriminate between oscillating inputs. The state will be
recognized if the input is maintained for a period consisting of the protection pass plus the
debounce setting.
Contact Input 1 and Contact Input 2 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively
and are used for monitoring the Winding1 breaker open/close state when wired to the
Winding 1 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
Contact Input 3 and Contact Input 4 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively
and are used for monitoring the Winding2 breaker open/close state when wired to the
Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.

Output relays
The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays
designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip, four general purpose
relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6), and a Critical Failure relay. The special purpose relays have
fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the
user.
Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the
circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
• The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the
command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays, it
will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a
breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
• If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
• If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a contact
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets.
• If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time, then this delay is added to
the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.

52a Contact 52b Contact Relay Operation

Configured Configured
Yes Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker.
Yes No Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an
open breaker.
No Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker.
No No Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay
expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Output Relay 1 - W1 The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
breaker "Trip" keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP
RLY1 SEAL-IN
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output,
thus extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
For details see Common setpoints.
This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay. When the selected input is asserted,
the Trip Output relay will be blocked.

Output Relay 2 - W2 PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP
breaker "Trip" RLY2 SEAL-IN
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Trip output,
thus extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP
For details see Common setpoints.
This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay. When the selected input is
asserted, the Close Output relay will be blocked. The block function can be useful for
breaker maintenance purposes.

6–98 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52b CONTACT
Contact input

AND
LED: BREAKER OPEN
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)

Breaker Open

OR
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52a CONTACT

OR
SETPOINT

OR
Contact input No feedback timer

AND
change Trip Output Seal-In time

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2 sec

AND
52a contact (Breaker Close = 1)
AND
tRST

SETPOINT
BLOCK TRIP RLY
Disbaled = 0 At least one
contact LED: TRIP
OR

(Selected Input, ON = 1)
AND

programmed

OR
TRIP
Relay ( Ready = 1)
OR

Operate Output Relay 1

OR
(W1 BKR TRIP)

OR
TRIP

AND
Trip
TRIP (Protection, Controls)
to Breaker Failure
Local Open (Relay Keypad)
Trip request
Figure 6-41: Relay 1 "TRIP" and Relay #2 "TRIP" logic diagram

timed reset

OR
Remote Open timer
RUN
LOCKOUT OP 100 ms

LED: TRIP
SETPOINT (BF)
RESET (Relay Keypad)
BF FUNCTION:
SETPOINT (BF)
RESET (Communications) Disabled = 0 897775A1.cdr
BF TIME DELAYS

OR
Latched Alarm

OR
RUN
OR

RESET (Input) Alarm

AND
Breaker Control
tRST

6–99
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
 S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Auxiliary Output The 345 relay is equipped with four auxiliary output relays numbered from 3 to 6. All these
Relays 3 to 6 relays are available for selection for operation of protection, control, or maintenance
features. Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset, or Latched. If the Self-
Reset type is selected, the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in
operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected,
the output relay will stay energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized
upon the reset command.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 3(6) AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self Reset, Latched
Default: Self Reset

Figure 6-42: Auxiliary relays

RESET (Relay Keypad)

RESET (Communications)
OR

RESET (Input)
Breaker Control
AND

SETPOINT
OR

RELAY (3-6) AUXILIARY

Operate Aux
AND

OUTPUT TYPE
Output Relay ( 3 - 6 )
OR

Latched
Self-Reset
AND

Message &
Event Recorder

Relay( Ready = 1)
AND

Assigned aux. outputs:

From Protection Feature

From Control Feature

OR

897777.cdr
From Maintenance Feature

6–100 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
Virtual input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input Function, and selecting
the Virtual Input Type Self-Reset or Latched under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
VIRTUAL INPUTS. Next, the user can assign a command On/Off to the enabled Virtual Input
under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic
diagram below, a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset, or Latched.
When Self-Reset is selected and the “On” command is executed, the virtual input is
evaluated as a pulse at a rate of one protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual
input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger source to a logic element with a dropout timer set
to the desired pulse time. Selecting the Latched type, will latch the virtual input state, when
the “On” command is executed.
The "On" state of the Virtual Input will be retained in the case of cycling of the relay control
NOTE:

power supply.
NOTE
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
VI x NAME
Range: 14 characters
Default: Virtual IN x
This setting defines a programmable name for the Virtual Input.
VI x FUNCTION
Range: Disabled/Enabled
Default: Disabled
The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled. All virtual
inputs will appear under the S4 CONTROLS > SETPOINTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS menu.
VI x TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
When the Self-Reset type is selected, the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one
protection pass only, upon “On” initiation and it will reset. When the Latched type is
selected, the virtual input will keep the state “On” until reset command “Off” is initiated.
See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS, on how to trigger a virtual input
NOTE:

signal state.
NOTE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Figure 6-43: Virtual inputs scheme logic

SETPOINT
V INPUT FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1

AND
S
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"

From
Control
menu LATCH ACTUAL VALUES
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0" V INPUT 1 NAME:
(Operand)

AND
R

OR
V Input 1 Status

SETPOINT
AND

V INPUT 1 TYPE
Latched
Self-Reset 897774.cdr

Remote inputs
Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista 3 Series
Setup software. Refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details.

Remote outputs
Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista 3 Series
Setup software. Refer to the 3 Series Communications Guide for details.

6–102 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S6 MONITORING

S6 Monitoring
Figure 6-44: Main monitoring menu

S6 MONITORING
DEMAND DEMAND
CURRENT DMD 1
▼
CURRENT DMD 2

897849A1.cdr

Demand
Current Demand is measured on each phase, and on three phases for real, reactive, and
apparent power. Setpoints allow the user to emulate some common electrical utility
demand measuring techniques for statistical or control purposes.
The relay is not approved as, or intended to be, a revenue metering instrument. If used in a
FASTPATH:

peak load control system, the user must consider the accuracy rating and method of
measurement employed, and the source VTs and CTs, in comparison with the electrical
utility revenue metering system.

The relay can be set to calculate Demand by any of three methods.

• Thermal Exponential: This selection emulates the action of an analog peak recording
Thermal Demand meter. The relay measures the quantity (RMS current, real power,
reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes the
circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It
calculates the Thermal Demand equivalent based on:
d(t) = D(1 - e-kt)
Where:
d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes),
D = input quantity (constant),
k = 2.3/thermal 90% response time.
Figure 6-45: Thermal Demand Characteristic (15 min response)

The 90% thermal response time characteristic defaults to 15 minutes. A setpoint

establishes the time to reach 90% of a steady-state value, just as with the response
time of an analog instrument. A steady-state value applied for twice the response
time will indicate 99% of the value.
• Block Interval: This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current,
real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over the programmed Demand time
interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12 am). The 1440 minutes per day is divided into
the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of
Demand becomes available at the end of each time interval.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 S6 MONITORING CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

• Rolling Demand: This selection calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS
current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over the programmed
Demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every
minute and indicates the Demand over the time interval just proceeding the time of
update.

Current demand The Current Demand for each phase is calculated individually, and the Demand for each
phase is monitored by comparison with a single Current Demand Pickup value. If the
Current Demand Pickup is equalled or exceeded by any phase, the relay can cause an
alarm or signal an output relay.
Path: S6 MONITORING > DEMAND > CURRENT DEMAND 1
Path: S6 MONITORING > DEMAND > CURRENT DEMAND 2
FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
CT INPUT
Range: CT (W1), CT (W2)
Default: CT (W1)
Select the current inputs from W1 CT, or W2 CT.
MEASUREMENT TYPE
Range: Blk Interval, Exponential, Rolling Dmd
Default: Blk Interval
This setting sets the measurement method. Three methods can be applied.
THERMAL 90% RESPONSE TIME
Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 15 min
This setpoint sets the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the
actual value and allows the user to approximately match the response of the relay to
analog instruments. The setpoint is visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is “Exponential”.
TIME INTERVAL
Range: 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min
Default: 20 min
This setpoint sets the time period over which the current demand calculation is to be
performed. The setpoint is visible only if MEASUREMENT TYPE is “Block Interval” or
“Rolling Demand”.
PKP
Range: 10 to 10000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 1000 A
This setpoint sets the Current Demand Pickup level.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK
For details see Common setpoints.

6–104 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

LED: ALARM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AND
SETPOINTS
OR

S
FUNCTION :
AND
Disabled LATCH

Alarm Set-

OR
Command Dominant
Latched Alarm
RESET R

SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1:

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Off = 0
BLOCK 2:

AND
Off = 0

OR
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0

RTD temperature monitoring (49T)

SETPOINTS

MEASUREMENT TYPE :
Figure 6-46: Current Demand logic diagram

THERMAL 90%
RESPONSE TIME :
SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
TIME INTERVAL : PICKUP:
Current Inputs CT INPUT:
RUN
Calculate Phase A
Phase A Current (IA) IA Demand ≥PICKUP SETPOINT
CURRENT DEMAND
RUN
Calculate Phase B OUTPUT RELAY X
OR

Phase B Current (IB) CT (W1), CT (W2) IB Demand ≥PICKUP

CURRENT DEMAND
RUN Do Not Operate, Operate
Calculate Phase C
Phase C Current (IC) IC Demand ≥PICKUP
CURRENT DEMAND

LED: PICKUP

FlexLogic Operands

Current Dmd1 PKP

The 345 supports up to 12 RTD inputs from Remote Module Inputs/Outputs (RMIO).
Current Dmd1 PKP A

Current Dmd1 PKP B

Current Dmd1 PKP C

6–105
S6 MONITORING

897845A1.CDR
 S6 MONITORING CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

As an option, a CANBUS-based RMIO module can be installed on the 345, which can
monitor up to 12 RTDs. The RTD protection setpoints can be seen only if the 345 has the
RMIO module installed and validated. If, for some reason, communication with the RMIO
module is lost or interrupted, the 345 will issue an RMIO MISMATCH self-test error
indicating the failure. This feature is useful as it ensures that the remote RTDs are being
continuously monitored.
The RTD type supported is 100 Ohm Platinum. Each of these may be configured to have a
trip temperature as well as an alarm temperature. The alarm temperature is normally set
slightly above the normal running temperature. The trip temperature is normally set at the
insulation rating. Trip Voting has been added for extra security in the event of RTD
malfunction. If enabled, a second RTD must also exceed the trip temperature of the RTD
being checked before a trip will be issued. If the RTD is chosen to vote with itself, the voting
feature is disabled.
Each RTD may also be configured as being of application type Ambient, Top-Oil, Bottom-
Oil, or Other. The table below - RTD Temperature vs Resistance - lists RTD resistance versus
temperature.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S6 MONITORING > RTD TEMPERATURE > RTD #1(12)
RTD #1 to 12 APPLICATION
Range: None, Top-oil, Bottom-oil, Ambient, Other
Default: None
Sets the application type.
RTD #1 to 12 NAME
Range: 1 to 18 characters
Default: RTD 1(12)
Sets the RTD programmable name.
RTD #1 to 12 ALARM
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the RTD #1 to 12 Alarm functionality.
RTD #1 to 12 ALARM TEMP
Range: 1oC to 250oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 130oC
Sets the Alarm temperature.
RTD #1 to 12 ALARM PKP DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 2.00 s
Sets the Alarm pickup delay time.
RTD #1 to 12 ALARM DPO DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 2.00 s
Sets the Alarm dropout delay time.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the RTD #1 to 12 Trip functionality.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP TEMP
Range: 1oC to 250oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 155oC
Sets the Trip temperature.

6–106 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S6 MONITORING

RTD #1 to 12 TRIP PKP DELAY

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 2.00 s
Sets the Trip pickup delay time.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP DPO DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
Sets the Trip dropout delay time.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP VOTING
Range: Off, RTD #1 to 12
Default: Off
Sets the redundant RTD that must also exceed this RTD’s trip temperature for a trip to
occur.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1 to 3
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–108
S6 MONITORING

SETTING
S3 RTD PROTECTION
RTD #1 Alarm
Enabled = 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AND
Disabled = 0
RTD #1 Trip
Enabled = 1
AND
Disabled = 0

ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS

SETTINGS
S3 RTD PROTECTION Operate output
SETTINGS relays upon selection
BLOCK 1 S3 RTD PROTECTION
Off = 0
RTD #1 Alarm Temp
BLOCK 2 RTD #1 Trip Temp
Off = 0 OR SETPOINTS

Alarm Pickup Delay LOGIC OPERAND

BLOCK 3 o
T > 250 C Alarm Dropout Delay RTD #1 Alarm PKP
Off = 0 tPKP tRST RTD #1 Alarm OP

AND
RUN
T > Alarm Temp Any Alarm OP
T RTD #1 Trip PKP
RTD #1 Trip OP
Figure 6-47: RTD Protection logic diagram

RUN SETPOINTS
T > Trip Temp Any Trip OP
Trip Pickup Delay
SETTING Trip Dropout Delay
AND

S3 RTD PROTECTION tPKP tRST S TARGET MESSAGE

RTD #1 Trip Voting LATCH RTD #1 Alarm
RTD #1 SETTING State: Operate
#1 OFF R
S3 RTD PROTECTION
RTD #2 RTD #1 Trip
#2
RTD #1 Trip Temp State: Trip
RTD #3
#3
T RTD #1 Alarm
T > 250 o C
RTD #10 State: Pickup
#10 AND
RTD #11 RTD #1 Trip
#11 T > Trip Temp
OR State: Pickup
RTD #12
#12
Setting = Off
OR
Setting = RTD #1
KEYPAD RESET

SETPOINTS/S4 CONTROLS/ OR
BREAKER CONTROL
RESET
Off = 0

SETPOINTS/S4 CONTROLS/
Logic is shown for RTD #1; other RTDs are similar. LOCKOUT
RESET LOCKOUT
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

897828A2.cdr
Off = 0
 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S6 MONITORING

THE RTD TROUBLE ALARM

All RTDs that are programmed with either an alarm or a trip are monitored for sensor
failure. When the measured temperature is greater than 250ºC or less than -50ºC, the RTD
is declared failed and a common RTD trouble alarm is issued.
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
Range: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
This setting enables the RTD Trouble Alarm functionality.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
BLOCK 1 to 3
For details see Common setpoints.
Table 6-11: RTD Temperature vs Resistance
Temperature 100 Ω Pt (DIN 43760)
oC oF

–50 –58 80.31

–40 –40 84.27
–30 –22 88.22
–20 –4 92.16
–10 14 96.09
0 32 100.00
10 50 103.90
20 68 107.79
30 86 111.67
40 104 115.54
50 122 119.39
60 140 123.24
70 158 127.07
80 176 130.89
90 194 134.70
100 212 138.50
110 230 142.29
120 248 146.06
130 266 149.82
140 284 153.58
150 302 157.32
160 320 161.04
170 338 164.76
180 356 168.47
190 374 172.46
200 392 175.84
210 410 179.51
220 428 183.17
230 446 186.82
240 464 190.45
250 482 194.08

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6–110
S6 MONITORING

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SETTING
S3 RTD TROUBLE ALARM
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
Enabled = 1
AND
Disabled = 0

SETTINGS
OUTPUT RELAY X
RTD TROUBLE ALARM Do Not Operate, Operate
RUN

SETTINGS
RTD #1 Temp T1
S3 RTD TROUBLE ALARM
BLOCK 1 o
T1 > 250 C
Figure 6-48: RTD Trouble Alarm logic diagram

Off = 0 T1 OR
LOGIC OPERAND
BLOCK 2 T1 < -50oC
RTD Trouble Alarm OP
Off = 0 OR Any Alarm OP
BLOCK 3
Off = 0 From other RTDs
From other RTDs OR

RTD #12 Temp T12 TARGET MESSAGE

ACTUAL VALUE RTD Trouble Alarm
RTD #1 Temp T12 > 250oC State: Operate
T12 OR
o
T12 < -50 C

RTD #12 Temp

896829A3.cdr
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 7: Maintenance

Maintenance

Information about the relay and the breaker can be obtained through the features
included in the Maintenance page.
Figure 7-1: Main maintenance menu

MAINTENANCE
M1 RELAY INFO
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
ٕ
M4 BKR MONITOR
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
M7 TESTING
898761A2.cdr

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M1 RELAY INFORMATION CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

M1 Relay information
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO
RELAY NAME
Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 14 characters
Default: Transformer Name
ORDER CODE
345-EP5G5HEMNN3EDN
This screen shows the relay order code.
RMIO
Range: G, GG, GGG, GGGG
Displays the validated RMIO. This value will be seen only if the RMIO module is installed.
MAIN FIRMWARE REV
1.41
This screen shows the relay firmware revision.
MAIN BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2015
This screen shows the relay firmware build date.
MAIN BUILD TIME
16:12:32
This screen shows the relay firmware build time.
MAIN BOOT REVISION
1.20
This screen shows the relay boot code revision.
MAIN BOOT DATE
Dec 11 2015
This screen shows the relay boot code date.
MAIN BOOT TIME
10:44:54
This screen shows the relay boot code time.
COMM FIRMWARE REV
1.40
This screen shows the relay communication firmware revision.
COMM BUILD TIME
16:59:27
This screen shows the relay communication firmware build time.
COMM BOOT REVISION
1.30
This screen shows the relay communication boot code revision.
COMM BOOT DATE
Apr 7 2015
This screen shows the relay communication boot code date.

7–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFORMATION

COMM BOOT TIME

16:22:41
This screen shows the relay communication boot code time.
SERIAL NUMBER
ML0T09000001
Each 345 relay has a unique Serial Number.
ETHERNET MAC ADR
00.A0.F4.08.A0.E9
Each 345 relay has a unique Mac Address.
FPGA VERSION
1.00

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

M3 Breaker maintenance
Figure 7-2: Breaker maintenance menu

M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
W1 BKRTRIP COIL
W2 BKRTRIP COIL

897860A1.cdr

Trip coil
NOTE: .

The Trip coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output
relays: RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP and RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP. The voltage monitor is connected across
the Form A contact, and effectively the relay detects healthy current through the circuit.
An external jumper must be made between terminals “A2” and “A3” for Output Relay 1
(RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP) coil monitoring and "B4" and "B5" for Output Relay 2 (RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP)
coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a high
resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and
“MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figure below shows the connections of the breaker trip coil to the relay’s
trip output relay for voltage monitoring of the trip circuit.
Figure 7-3: Trip Coil circuit with voltage monitoring
DC + DC +

Output Relay 1 (TRIP) Output Relay 2 (TRIP)

External External
A2 jumper B4 jumper

B3 A4
V V
A3 B5

52a 52a
contact contact

Trip Trip
Coil Coil

897786.cdr
DC - DC -

Example 2: Some applications require that the Trip coil be monitored continuously,
regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a
suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52a in the trip circuit. With
such connections, the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the breaker is
open. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set to
ENABLED.

7–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE

Figure 7-4: Trip circuits with continuous monitoring

DC +

Output Relay 1 (TRIP)

External
A2 jumper

B3
V
A3

52a contact R By-pass

resistor

Trip
Coil

DC - 897787.cdr

DC +

Output Relay 2 (TRIP)

External
B4 jumper

A4
V
B5

52a contact R By-pass

resistor

Trip
Coil
897788.cdr

DC -

The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > W1(W2) BKR TRIP
RLY1(2) COIL FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
The “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a RLY1(2) coil
circuitry problem.
RLY1(2) COIL DELAY
Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 s
This setting defines the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor Delay, before targets appear on the display,
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel, and selected output
relays operate.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

BYPASS BKR STATUS

Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Set the “BYPASS BKR STATE” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the
breaker auxiliary contact for continuous RLY1(2) circuit integrity monitoring. The circuits
will be monitored regardless of breaker position. When “BYPASS BKR STATE” is set to
Disabled, monitoring of the RLY1(2) coil will be blocked when the breaker is open.
OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
For details see Common setpoints.

7–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

SETPOINT R
OR

TRIP COIL FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0
AND

Latched Alarm
Message

OR
Alarm
Trip Coil Montr OP

Trip Coil current above LED:

Figure 7-5: Trip coil monitoring logic diagram

threshold SETPOINT MAINTENANCE

TRIP COIL DELAY:

SETPOINT:
From output relay 1(2)
tPKP
OUTPUT RELAY X

AND
Trip
Do Not Operate, Operate

AND
Breaker Closed

52a/b INPUTS

Event Recorder

OR
SETPOINT Message
BYPASS BKR STATE
Trip Coil Montr PKP Transient Recorder
Enabled = 1
Disable = 0 898020A1.cdr

7–7
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
 M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

Breaker trip counter

When the total number of breaker trips detected reaches the TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
setpoint, an output will occur.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > W1 (W2) BKR TRIP COUNTER
TRIP COUNT FUNC
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
INITIAL TRIPS
Range: 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This setting defines the number of breaker trips, that occurred before enabling the
breaker trip counter for breaker monitoring.
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
Range: 1 to 10000 trips in steps of 1
Default: 1 trip
This setting defines the limit number for breaker trips. The BKR TRIP COUNTER will
operate and produce an output if the number of breaker trips reaches the set limit.
OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
For details see Common setpoints.

7–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Command
RESET

LED: ALARM
S
AND

LATCH

SETPOINT R
OR

TRIP COUNTER FUNC

AND

Disabled = 0
Latched Alarm

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

OR
Alarm

SETPOINT

OUTPUT RELAY X

SETPOINT Do Not Operate, Operate

INITIAL BKR TRIPS

Figure 7-6: W1 (W2) BKR trip counter logic diagram

SETPOINT
ACTUAL VALUES
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
BRK TRIP COUNTER
RUN
Breaker
Message
0 ms Initial trips
Trip W1 Breaker Counter = Initial trips +
new trips
TOTAL ≥ LIMIT W1 BKR Trip Count Alm OP
t DPO = 100 ms Increment
Counter

AND
52a/b contact (W1 Breaker Open)
Set to Zero

Counter = 0

W1 BKR Trip Count RST

AND

SETPOINT Event Recorder

RST W1 BKR TRIP COUNT Transient Recorder

No = 0
897773A3.cdr
Yes

7–9
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
 M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

Breaker health
The 345 relay provides breaker health information by monitoring and analyzing the
tripping time, closing time and the spring charging time. The breaker health status
depends on many factors, such as number of permissible operations, magnitude of
breaking current, mechanical wear, and contact wear.
The operation count provides direct information when compared to the maximum number
of permissible breaker operations. Longer tripping times and closing times can provide an
estimation of trip/close coil mechanical wear. An increased spring charging time may give
early notice of developing problems in motor and spring mechanisms.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > W1 (W2) BKR HEALTH
BREAKER HEALTH FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
BREAKER HEALTH MODE
Range: Detection, Monitoring
Default: Detection
The Breaker HEALTH function has two running modes, detection and monitoring. Since
the monitored time intervals differ for different breaker types and manufacturers, the
detection mode can be used to help users configure the pickup settings based on
historical true values. The tripping time, closing time, and spring charging time are
measured and displayed under MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR. The Breaker Alarm
Counter element does not pick up when in detection mode. Monitoring mode is the
normal mode, where measurements are analyzed and the element picks up accordingly.
ALARM COUNTER LIMIT
Range: 0 to 100000 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This setting selects count limit for the alarm counter above which the Breaker Alarm
Counter function will pick up and produce an alarm.
The alarm counter is increased if any of the following conditions are present:
– The actual breaker trip time is higher than the preset TRIP TIME PICKUP
– The actual breaker closing time is higher than the preset CLOSE TIME PICKUP
– The actual spring charging time is higher than the preset CHARGE TIME PICKUP
TRIP TIME PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.05 s
This setting defines the pickup level of the Trip time. The Trip time interval is initiated by
the TRIP TRIGGER signal and stopped by OPEN STATUS signal.
The trip time of the breaker is detected based on the trip or open command issued by
the relay, and the detection of breaker open status.
CLOSE CMND INPUT
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects an operand (in most cases a contact input wired from the breaker
control switch) to indicate a close command has been sent to the breaker externally. The
"high" state of the operand is used to start the Close timer.

7–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE

CLOSE TIME PICKUP

Range: 0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.05 s
This setting defines the pickup level of the Close time. The Close time interval is initiated
by the CLOSE TRIGGER signal and stopped by CLOSE STATUS signal.
The close time of the breaker is detected based on the close command issued by the
relay, and the detection of breaker close status.
INCOMP TRP/CLS TIME
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
This setting declares a breaker operation failure condition if the breaker does not
respond within this time delay. This setting should be greater than the TRIP TIME PICKUP
value and CLOSE TIME PICKUP value.
SPRING CHARGE INPUT
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects the signal to show the status of Spring Charge. Normally, the contact
input connected to the auxiliary contact of the limit switch can be used.
CHARGE TIME PICKUP
Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 15.00 s
This setting defines the pickup level of the Spring Charge time. The Spring Charge time is
measured from the pulse duration of the SPRING CHARGE STATUS.
INCOMP CHARGE TIME
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 45.00 s
This setting declares a Charge time failure condition if the spring charging process is not
finished after this time delay. This setting should be greater than the CHARGE TIME
PICKUP value.
BLOCK 1 (3)
For details see Common setpoints.
The element will be blocked when the selected operand is asserted. For example, the
breaker failure operand can be used to block this element.
OUTPUT RELAY X
For details see Common setpoints.
Figure 7-7: Breaker health logic diagram

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

LED: ALARM

AND

OR
AND
S

LATCH
Set-Dominant
Command
RESET R

SETPOINTS
BREAKER HEALTH
FUNCTION:
Disabled SETPOINTS
Alarm OR BREAKER HEALTH
ALM COUNTER LIMIT Logic Operands
Latched Alarm IN RUN
BKR Health Alarm
SETPOINTS Alarm
Counter Real Counter ≥ Alarm
BREAKER HEALTH Command SETPOINTS
MODE: CLEAR RESET OUTPUT RELAYS X
Detection
Do Not Operate, Operate

AND
Monitoring

SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1/2/3:
Off=0

SETPOINTS

OR
BREAKER HEALTH
TRIP COMND INPUT
AND

Off=0 SETPOINTS
BREAKER HEALTH
OR

TRIP TIME PICKUP:

Any Trip RUN
345 only START BKR Trip Time Alm
t_trip t_trip ≥ PKP
Breaker Opened STOP
from breaker status

Command

AND
RESET

SETPOINTS

BKR HEALTH
OR

INCOMP . TRP/CLS TIME

AND

RUN

OR
BKR TRP/CLS Fail
t_ITCT
OR
OR
AND

345 only
SETPOINTS
BREAKER HEALTH
CLOSE COMND INPUT
AND

Off=0 SETPOINTS
BREAKER HEALTH
CLOSE TIME PICKUP:
RUN
START BKR Close Time Alm
t_close t_close ≥ Ｐ Ｋ Ｐ
Breaker Closed STOP
from breaker status

SETPOINTS SETPOINTS
BREAKER HEALTH
BREAKER HEALTH
CHARGE TIME PICKUP:
SPRING CHARGE INPUT
RUN
Off=0 BKR Chrge Time Alm
t_charge t_charge ≥ Ｐ Ｋ Ｐ

SETPOINTS

BREAKER HEALTH
INCOMP . CHARGE TIME

RUN
t_ICT
BKR Charge Fail

897843A1.cdr

7–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE

Reset counters
Reset counter commands clear various counters.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 RESET COUNTERS
RST W1 (W2) BKR TRIP COUNT
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear the Trip Counters, and an event - "Reset Trip
Counter" - will be recorded
RST W1 (W2) BKR ALARM COUNT
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear the Alarm Counters, and an event - "Reset Alarm
Counter" - will be recorded
RST W1 (W2) BKR TRIP TIMES
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear the Trip Time Counters, and an event - "Reset Trip
Time Coutner" - will be recorded
RST W1 (W2) BKR CLOSE TIMES
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear the Close Time Counters, and an event - "Reset
Close Time Counter" - will be recorded
RST W1 (W2) BKR CHARGE TIMES
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear the Charge Time Counters, and an event - "Reset
Charge Time Counter" - will be recorded
RESET ALL
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear all counters, and an event - "Resets All Counters" -
will be recorded

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M4 BREAKER MONITOR CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

M4 Breaker monitor
The status of the breaker trip and close coils, as well as the trip and close circuits, can be
monitored under MAINTENANCE > M4 W1 (W2) BKR MONITOR. In the case where a
breaker coil or circuit fails, the relay will display the message "Unhealthy" for the
corresponding coil.
Further information on the breaker is provided under BKR TRIP COUNTER, where the
345 stores the number of trips. The counter can be reset under M3 RESET COUNTERS >
RST BKR TRIP COUNT set to "Yes".
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M4 W1 (W2) BKR MONITOR
W1 (W2) BKR TRIP COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
W1 (W2) BKR TRIP COUNTER
5
Range: 0 to 10000 trips
W1 (W2) BKR ALARM COUNTER
5
Range: 0 to 10000 trips
W1 (W2) LAST TRIP TIME
5
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
W1 (W2) AVG TRIP TIME
5
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
W1 (W2) LAST CLOSE TIME
5
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
W1 (W2) AVG CLOSE TIME
5
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
W1 (W2) LAST CHARGE TIME
5
Range: 0 to 60000 ms
W1 (W2) AVG CHARGE TIME
5
Range: 0 to 60000 ms

7–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE

M5 Relay maintenance
Ambient temperature
The 3 Series relay has a temperature monitor feature that measures the ambient
temperature around the chassis of the relay. The relay extrapolates the ambient
temperature from an internal temperature sensor inside the product. This feature can be
used to signal the customer that the product is being subjected to temperatures that can
degrade the product life and proper action should be initiated. For example the air
conditioning, heating or ventilation system should be checked.
The purpose of the feature is to measure the immediate temperature around the product.
There are several factors that can alter the measurement that need to be considered for
the application of this feature.
• Any forced air flow or obstructions that can interrupt even distribution of the ambient
temperature.
• Installation of the relay should be for normal operation (CT, VT, inputs, outputs).
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE > AMBIENT TEMP
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
For details see Common setpoints.
HI ALARM LEVEL
Range: 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 60°C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm high logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains above this level.
LOW ALARM LEVEL
Range: -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 10°C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm low logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains below this level.
HYSTERESIS LEVEL
Range: 2°C to 10°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 2°C
This setting allows the user to select the dropout level for the feature.
TIME DELAY
Range: 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 1 min
This timer starts when either the high or low level thresholds have exceeded their
respective levels.
OUTPUT RELAY X
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
For details see Common setpoints.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7–16
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SETTING
AMB TEMP ALARM
Disabled = 0
Alarm
OR
Latched Alarm

SETTINGS
AMB TEMP ALARM SETTINGS
Hi Alarm Level Output Relay X
Low Alarm Level Do Not Operate, Operate

RUN SETTING
T > High Temp TIME DELAY LOGIC OPERAND
OR RUN
Amb Temp HI Alarm PKP
RUN AND
OR Any Alarm OP
T < Low Temp tRST AND S
Amb Temp HI Alarm OP
LATCH
R TARGET MESSAGE
Amb Temp HI Alarm
State: Pickup
Amb Temp HI Alarm
State: Operate
Figure 7-8: Ambient Temperature Alarm logic diagram

KEYPAD RESET

INPUTS
Emergency Restart Input OR LOGIC OPERAND
AND
Lockout Reset Input AND Amb Temp LO Alarm PKP
Remote Reset Input AND
AND Any Alarm OP
AND S OR
Amb Temp LO Alarm OP
SETTINGS LATCH
S4 CONTROLS
R TARGET MESSAGE
Emergency Restart
Amb Temp LO Alarm
Off = 0 State: Pickup
Lockout Reset
Amb Temp LO Alarm
Off = 0 State: Operate
Remote Reset
898779A1.cdr
Off = 0
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M7 TESTING

M7 Testing
The Test Mode for 3 Series relays consists of testing front panel LEDs and Outputs Relays
The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the
Maintenance LED (faceplate option E), the In-Service LED, the Trouble LED, and the critical
fail relay, as shown in the following table.

Tests Test Mode Faceplate Output Relay In-Service Trouble Maintenance Critical fail relay Prot. & Control
Option setting LED LED LED (output 7) elements
All Test = Disabled E, L Normal Not Not Not affected Normal Normal
Disabled operation affected affected operation operation
Force LED = Enabled E Normal Blinking Not Off Energized Normal
Enabled operation GREEN affected operation
Force Output = Enabled E Controlled from Off Blinking On De-energized Not operational
Enabled Test settings Orange
All Test = Enabled E Controlled from Off Blinking Off De-energized Not operational
Enabled Test settings Orange
Force LED = Enabled L Normal Blinking Not Off Energized Normal
Enabled operation GREEN affected operation
Force Output = Enabled L Controlled from Off Blinking Off De-energized Not operational
Enabled Test settings Orange
All Test = Enabled L Controlled from Off Blinking Off De-energized Not operational
Enabled Test settings Orange

The following cases should be considered when using Test Mode:

1. When the relay is tripped, Test Mode cannot be Enabled.
Changing Force LEDs or Force Output Relays to "Enabled" will have no effect. The
value "Enabled" will not be accepted, and the value "Disabled" will be kept.
2. If the relay is in Force LEDs test mode, and trips, the relay leaves Test Mode and the
Force LEDs setting automatically changes to "Disabled".
Performing tests such as Forcing Output Relays should be carefully planned. Fault
NOTE:

conditions are not detected by the relay while in Force Output Relays mode, since the
NOTE protection and control elements are not operational during this mode.

Force LEDs
The LED lamp test is allows you to turn on each front panel LED individually. Testing the
LEDs is only available from the relay front panel.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M7 TESTING > FORCE LEDS
FORCE LEDS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When the Force LEDs setpoint is set to Enabled, the relay Maintenance LED starts
flashing (faceplate option E), the In-service LED turns off, and the Critical Failure Relay is
de-energized, indicating the relay is in test mode.
LED 1(12)
Range: Off, On
Default: Off

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M7 TESTING CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

Force output relays

For testing purposes, the 345 relay provides the ability to override the normal function of
the output contacts. This is done by forcing each of them to ON or OFF.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M7 TESTING > FORCE LEDS
FORCE OUTP RELAYS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Set FORCE OUTP RELAYS to "Enabled" to override the normal operation of the output
contact, with the programmed state.
When the FORCE OUTP RELAYS setpoint is set to Enabled, the relay Maintenance LED
starts flashing (faceplate option E), the In-service LED turns off, the Trouble LED starts
blinking orange, and the Critical Failure Relay is de-energized, indicating the relay is in
test mode. Output relays may then be turned on and off individually using the setpoints
listed below.
Note that the FORCE OUTP RELAYS setpoint will always default to the Disabled state at
NOTE:

power up.
NOTE
RELAY 1 TRIP
RELAY 2 CLOSE
RELAY X AUXILIARY
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Select "On" to energize the output, and "Off" to de-energize it. When energized, the
normally open contact of the output relay will close, and the normally closed contact will
open. FORCE OUTP RELAYS must be set to "Enabled" for this setting to take effect.

7–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance
The 345 requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its
characteristics do not change over time. The expected service life of a 345 is 20 years
when the environment and electrical conditions are within stated specifications.
While the 345 performs continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be
scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance can involve in-service, out-
of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.

In-service maintenance
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in
comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

Out-of-service maintenance
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering
accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification
of setting file entries against relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change
of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-
FASTPATH:

energized state once per year, for one hour continuously.

Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)

• View the event recorder and oscillography for correct operation of inputs, outputs,
and elements.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GENERAL MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE

7–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 GE
Grid Solutions

345 Transformer Protection System

Appendix

Appendix

Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE warrants most of its GE manufactured
products for 10 years. For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see
our Terms and Conditions at https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REPAIRS

Repairs
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for
repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in
the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support
Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or
packaging peanuts to cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby
you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and
RMA, to the factory.
Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the
unit is under warranty.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm

A-2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHANGE NOTES

Change Notes
Manual Revision history

Table 1: Revision History

MANUAL P/N RELEASE DATE
1601-9098-A1 12 February 2010
1601-9098-A2 6 December 2010
1601-9098-A5 9 December 2011
1601-9098-A6 29 February 2012
1601-9098-A7 14 September 2012
1601-9098-A8 13 June 2013
1601-9098-A9 12 July 2013
1601-9098-AA 21 October 2013
1601-9098-AB 26 August 2014
1601-9098-AC 17 December 2015
1601-9098-AD 15 July 2016
1601-9098-AE 10 March 2017
1601-9098-AF 30 September 2017

Table 2: Major Updates to SR345-AF

Page Number CHANGES
Changed manual revision number to AF
Chapter 1 Updated Table 1-2
Correction to order codes: Current Protection option M
Updated notes at the beginning of the Specifications section
Updated voltage and current input accuracy to be at nominal
frequency
Updated power supply power consumption
Chapter 6 S4 Controls Logic Elements: note added
General Minor Corrections

Table 3: Major Updates to SR345-AE

Page Number CHANGES
Changed manual revision number to AE
Changed 345 revision to 2.3x
General Changed features for 2.3x:
RTD logic diagram updated
Programmable LEDs setpoint
added to configure LEDs as self-reset or latched
Event Recorder
Lockout setpoint descriptions updated
Password and Security setpoint added and description updated
Trip Counter logic diagram updated

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHANGE NOTES

Table 3: Major Updates to SR345-AE

Page Number CHANGES
General New features for 2.3x:
RTD (S6 Monitoring)
Chapter 1 Updated Order Codes
Updated Line Diagram and Table 1-1 Protection Elements
Chapter 6 Breaker Tripping section adding under S3 Protection
Chapter 7 Breaker Health section adding under M3 Breaker Maintenance
General Minor Corrections

A-4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHANGE NOTES

Table 4: Major Updates to SR345-AD

Page Number CHANGES
Changed manual revision number to AD
Changed 345 revision to 2.2x
General Changed features for 2.2x:
Logic Elements, Thermal Overload, Transient Recorder.
General New features for 2.2x:
Programmable LEDs, Trip Counter, Fault Reports, Lockout, Demand,
Testing.
Chapter 1 Updated Order Codes
Updated Line Diagram and Table 1-1 Protection Elements
Added Table 1-2 Other Elements
Chapter 6 Updated Common Setpoints section
Removed duplicate FUNCTION and OUTPUT RELAY descriptions,
referring instead to Common Setpoints section.
General Minor Corrections

Table 5: Major Updates to SR345-AC

Page Number CHANGES
Changed manual revision number to AC
Changed branding to Grid Solutions
Updated logos
Chapter 1 Order codes: Added Accessories list
Specifications, Data capture, updated Clock Accuracy
Specifications, Power Supply:
- Changed High Range Power Supply Range to 250 VDC
- Added Fuse rating
Specifications, Controls, Breaker Failure: added Reset Time
Specifications, Testing and certification:
- Added EAC certification
- Added Country of origin, Date of manufacture,
Declaration of Conformity
- Updated Dielectric voltage withstand test levels
Specifications: added Physical and Environmental (from QSG)
Chapter 2 Added IP20 cover (optional)
Chapter 3 Added Upgrading the software
Updated Downloading and saving setpoint files
Added Uninstalling files and clearing data
Updated Loading new relay firmware
Chapter 5 Updated Quick Setup Menu ranges and default values
Chapter 6 Removed Direction setpoints from Common Setpoints section
Added SNTP settings to Clock section
Updated Subnet IP Mask default setting
Updated Buffer Setup default setting
Updated Trigger Position default settings
Updated Transformer type default setting
Updated Transformer percent differential: Slope 1 default setting
Updated Transformer thermal protection: Cool time constant
default setting
Updated Phased TOC protection: PH TOC1 (2) PKP range
Updated Ground TOC protection range values
Updated Neutral TOC protection: NTRL TOC1 (2) PKP range
Chapter 7 Added General maintenance
Appendix Added Repairs
n/a Minor corrections throughout manual.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHANGE NOTES

Table 6: Major Updates to SR345-AB

Page Number CHANGES
Changed manual revision number to AB and 345 revision number to
1.5x
Chapter 1 Added note to specifications
Chapter 1 Changed Time Delay Accuracy to Curve Timing Accuracy
Chapter 3 Updated hardware and software requirements
Chapter 3 Replaced image for Transient Recorder Viewer window with
updated image

Table 7: Major Updates to SR345-AA

Page Number CHANGES
Change manual revision number to AA
Chapter 6 Transformer percent differential, BREAK 2 description

Table 8: Major Updates to SR345-A9

Page Number CHANGES
Change manual revision number to A9
Chapter 6 Clarify SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE Details

Table 9: Major Updates to SR345-A8

Page Number CHANGES
Change manual revision number to A8
Chapter 1 Updated Testing and Certification table
General Minor Corrections

Table 10: Major Updates to SR345-A7

Page Number CHANGES
Change manual revision number to A7
Chapter 1 Add Case design option N (relay with non-drawout design)
Chapter 2 Add dimensions, mounting and wiring for non-drawout unit
General Minor Corrections

Table 11: Major Updates to SR345-A6

Page Number CHANGES
Change manual revision number to A6
Chapter 2 Revise Control Power parameters

A-6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHANGE NOTES

Table 12: Major Updates to SR345-A5

Page Number CHANGES
Change manual revision number to A5
Chapter 1 Add Comm option 3E to Order Code Table
Chapter 7 Add Ambient Temp section (Ch 7 - Maintenance)
General Increase number of Logic Elements to 16
General Minor Corrections
General Add support for additional safety/protection elements

Table 13: Major Updates for SR345-A3 and A4

Page Number CHANGES
Minor changes

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CHANGE NOTES

A-8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine